JP2012165934A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enable novel notice when performing outguessing and notification in the game machine which is provided with a variation display device capable of executing a variation display game varying and displaying identification information on the basis of entering of a game ball into a starting prize-winning region and which generates a special play condition to a player when the stoppage of the variation display game leads to a predetermined special result.SOLUTION: The game machine includes information giving means (performance control device 300) for executing predetermined performance including effecting the operation of a starting storage display 41b controlled to be in a specific display mode and gives information relating to the result of stoppage of a variation display game under execution or a variation display game to be executed on the basis of starting memory stored in starting prize-winning storage means (play control device 100).

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area, and the stop result of the variable display game has a predetermined special result. In some cases, the present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. This pachinko machine has a variation in which a plurality of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device fluctuates based on a game ball winning at a start opening provided in a game area (start winning award). When the display game is executed and a plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after a predetermined time have passed in a special result mode, a special game state in which a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player (a big hit state) There are some that allow players to earn a lot of profit.

  This type of pachinko machine generally extracts a random number for determining the execution result of the variable display game based on the start winning, and stores the random number as the start memory. In addition, prior to execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, it is determined in advance whether or not a special result mode is derived for the random number stored as the start memory, and the result of the prior determination It is also common to execute a so-called pre-reading notice that informs the player of this. Patent Document 1 describes a pachinko machine that notifies the expectation of an unexecuted variable display game by changing the display mode of the start memory display as a pre-reading notice.

JP 2003-154106 A

  However, when performing the pre-reading notice, it is common to simply change the display mode of the target start memory display as in Patent Document 1, and the effect in the start memory display area where the start memory display is performed, or the target start There was no such thing as production including start memory other than memory.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area, and a special result in which the stop result of the variable display game is determined in advance. In such a case, in a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, it is possible to perform a novel advance notice when making a pre-read advance notice.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the invention described in claim 1 includes a variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on winning of a game ball in the start winning area,
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous for a player when the result of stopping the variable display game is a special result determined in advance,
Start winning storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory for executing the variable display game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start winning memory means on the variable display device;
Prior result determination means for determining a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory;
Display control means for controlling display contents displayed on the variable display device;
With
The display control means includes
Display mode control means capable of controlling the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the start memory to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode in relation to the determination result of the prior result determination unit for the start memory; ,
A variation that is executed based on a variation display game being executed or a start memory stored in the start winning memory means by executing a predetermined effect including operating a start memory display controlled in the specific display mode Information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the display game;
It is characterized by providing.

Here, for the predetermined random number, a jackpot random number for determining whether or not a special result is obtained, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of the special result, and a variation pattern (variation mode) of the variation display game are determined. Variation pattern random number for the purpose. The information related to the stop result of the variable display game includes the stop result itself (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number judgment information) and the process until the stop result is derived (fluctuation pattern random number judgment information). .
The normal display mode may be anything as long as it does not give the player a special expectation, and the specific display mode is different from the normal display mode so that the player has a sense of expectation. This includes things that change color, things that change size, things that change shape, and things that blink.
In addition, operating the start memory display means that the display position is changed, the start memory display is variably displayed as in a variable display game, and only the contents of the start memory display are operated ( Only small circles move and only ○ remains).

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, a predetermined effect including operating the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is executed and stored in the running variable display game or the start winning memory means. Since the information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on the start memory is provided, a novel advance notice can be performed. That is, since the predetermined effect related to the notification of the game result is performed using the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode as a result of the prefetching, the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is operated. Innovative, such as notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on other start memory by the effect in the start memory display area or the start memory display operation controlled to a specific display mode Notice can be made. Moreover, it is novel not only to perform a pre-reading effect but also to produce an effect triggered by being controlled to a specific display mode, and in particular, since the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is operated, the specific display It can be enjoyed what kind of operation is performed after becoming the mode.

  The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information notification means includes a start memory display including the one controlled by the specific display mode when a specific number is displayed. The predetermined effect is executed.

  According to the invention described in claim 2, since the effect is executed when the start memory number reaches a specific number (such as 3 or 4), it is considered that the start memory is generated, and the effect is executed. The player's motivation can be stimulated and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. In addition, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for performing the effect.

A third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the display area in the variable display device displays a variable display area for displaying the identification information in a variable manner and the start memory display. The start memory display area is set respectively.
The display control means includes start memory display area enlargement means for enlarging the start memory display area more than usual when a predetermined effect is executed by the information notification means.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, the display control means has the start memory display area enlargement means for enlarging the start memory display area more than usual when the predetermined effect is executed by the information notification means. Notice can be made. That is, unlike the normal state in which the number of start memories is simply informed, the start memory display area is enlarged, so that the player can easily recognize that it is a special effect using the start memory display, and the effect Will increase. In particular, in the case where an effect is made by relating all the start memory displays, a dynamic movement or the like is possible by expanding the area, and the range of the effect is expanded.

  A fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the information notifying means executes an effect associating all of the specific number of start memory displays as the predetermined effect. Features.

  According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the effect is executed by associating all the start memory displays. Therefore, even if there is an uncontrolled start memory display in the specific display mode, the specific display is displayed if the effect starts. The start memory display which is not controlled by the aspect also contributes to the production, and all the start memory displays can have a sense of expectation.

A fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, wherein the display control unit divides the variable display area into a plurality of areas and displays the identification information in a variable manner in each of the plurality of areas. Including identification information variation control means
The display mode control means displays all start memory displays displayed in the start memory display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied including that the specific number of start memory displays are displayed in the start memory display area. Control to the specific display mode,
The information informing means operates, as the predetermined effect, each start memory display controlled to the specific display mode in correspondence with each divided area of the variable display area,
The identification information variation control means changes the variation mode of the identification information in the variation display area corresponding to the startup storage display controlled to the specific display mode according to the operation of the startup storage display.

  Here, changing the variation mode of the identification information according to the operation of the start memory display means stopping the variation of the identification information, changing the speed of the change, changing the temporarily stopped one , One that increases or decreases the type of identification information, one that changes the direction of fluctuation, one that changes the number of fluctuation lines, and the like.

  According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, since all the start memory displays are controlled to the specific display mode in accordance with the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation at the start of the production. . In addition, each start memory display is associated with each divided area of the variable display area, and the change mode of the identification information is changed according to the operation of the start memory display that has become the specific display mode. It is easy to understand the relationship between movement and changes in the variation of identification information, and it is possible to make a novel announcement that you can enjoy how the variation of identification information plays an important role in reporting special results. It becomes.

A sixth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, wherein the predetermined condition is:
A start memory corresponding to the latest start memory display is determined to derive the special result by the prior result determination means;
The preceding start memory corresponding to the preceding start memory display preceding the latest start memory display is determined not to derive the special result by the prior result determination means.

  According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the latest start memory that is digested last is a special result, and the effect is performed when the preceding start memory is lost. You can have a sense of expectation for the game. In addition, the execution time of the notice effect can be sufficiently secured, and the player's expectation can be effectively enhanced.

The invention according to claim 7 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the specific display mode includes a plurality of specific display modes,
The display mode control means includes a start condition in which the specific number of start memory displays is displayed in the start memory display area and there is a start memory determined by the prior result determination means to be the special result. Is established, it is possible to control all the start memory display displayed in the start memory display area to any one of the plurality of specific display modes,
The information notification means executes, as the predetermined effect, an effect that operates a part of the start memory display before all the start memory displays displayed in the start memory display area have the same specific display mode. It is characterized by that.

  According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, as a predetermined effect, if there is a start memory that gives a special result, all the start memory displays are in the same specific display mode, and all start memory is stored in the same specific display mode. It is possible to make a novel notice that the display is activated, and an effect like a variable display game is performed with the start memory display.

The invention according to claim 8 is the gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the predetermined condition is a plurality of start memory displays controlled in one specific display mode in the start memory display area, and A start memory display that is not controlled by one specific display mode is displayed at the same time,
The information notification means operates the start memory display that is not controlled to the one specific display mode as the predetermined effect, and changes the start memory display step by step by the display mode control unit. An effect of controlling to a specific display mode is executed.

  According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, in the process of performing an effect such as a variable display game by the start memory display, the start memory display controlled to one specific display mode and the one specific display mode are controlled. The start memory display that has not been generated forms a so-called reach state, and the start memory display that is not controlled to one specific display mode is changed step by step, so that all the start memory displays are one specific The expectation for becoming a display mode can be gradually increased, and a highly interesting production can be performed.

The invention according to claim 9 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the display control means changes step by step as the display content displayed in the variable display area, and as the step proceeds. Display and control a staged effect that informs that there is a high possibility of the special result,
The specific display mode includes a specific display mode corresponding to each stage of the staged effects,
The display mode control means responds to the predetermined start memory display when a plurality of start memory displays are displayed in the start memory display area and the predetermined start memory display is controlled to the specific display mode. Each time the start memory preceding the start memory to be used is digested, the predetermined start memory display can be controlled to a specific display mode advanced in the stage,
The information notifying means executes an effect of operating the start memory display in synchronization with the progress of the stage in the predetermined start memory display as the predetermined effect.

  According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to make a novel notice that the specific display mode is changed to a mode corresponding to each stage of staged effects appearing in the variable display game, and it is possible to grasp an increase in expectation. Cheap. Moreover, since the opportunity to change is a prior reservation digest, expectation can be gradually heightened with progress of a game.

  A tenth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect, wherein the information notification unit displays the predetermined start memory display as the predetermined effect in the variable display area. The predetermined start-up storage display is operated in association with the identification information displayed or the variable display.

  According to the invention described in claim 10, since the start memory display whose mode changes stepwise in relation to the effect appearing in the game being executed or the identification information is operated, the display contents are integrated. High production.

  According to the present invention, the predetermined presentation including operating the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is executed, and based on the start memory stored in the running variable display game or the start winning memory means. Since it is provided with information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game to be executed, it is possible to perform a novel advance notice. That is, since the predetermined effect related to the notification of the game result is performed using the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode as a result of the prefetching, the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is operated. Innovative, such as notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on other start memory by the effect in the start memory display area or the start memory display operation controlled to a specific display mode Notice can be made. In addition, it is novel not only to perform pre-reading effects but also to perform effects triggered by being controlled to a specific display mode, and in particular, since the start memory controlled to the specific display mode is operated, the specific display mode It is possible to have fun about what kind of operation is performed after becoming.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure game processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a stop symbol information setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the special effect information selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a latter half fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating jackpot end setting processing 1. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the jackpot end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a pending | holding number command reception process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of object holding | maintenance generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of prior alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of prior alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the start pattern of the prior alert | report in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the prior alerting | reporting in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prior alert | report in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure hold information determination process in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch reflection process in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the prior alerting | reporting in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prior alert | report in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the start pattern of the prior alert | report in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning pattern selection table in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in a 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prior alert | report in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure usual process in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of special figure 2 holding | maintenance generation | occurrence | production in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prior alert | report in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prior alert | report in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a start memory | storage display in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of reach state in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display of the connection part in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the start memory display in the 5th modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in fluctuation | variation in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the holding | maintenance fluctuation | variation completion setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st scene control process in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding fluctuation process in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding fluctuation setting process in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the starting memory display in the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the starting memory display in the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the starting memory display in the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the selection probability of the prefetch effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the hold display switching information setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the specific effect information setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the switching information addition setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the selection probability of the prefetch effect in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the specific effect information setting process in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display switching information setting process in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change information change setting processing in the 3rd modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change information change setting processing in the 3rd modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of the prefetch object hold | maintenance number in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the specific effect information setting process in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure 2 specific production | presentation setting process in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure 2 effect reservation display process in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change information change setting processing in the 5th modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the specific effect information setting process in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding display process in the 5th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in the 6th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of re-variation in the 6th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the prefetch effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the item in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of special result in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in round in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special promotion effect information setting process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the image pattern setting process in the production start round in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the image pattern setting process in the promotion effect round in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the image pattern setting process in the promotion determination effect round in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the image pattern setting process in the specific prefetch effect round in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the prefetch effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect in 6th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the production in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the effect in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the effect in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of specific display aspect in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the start memory display which can perform the pending | holding fluctuation | variation in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the production in the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch display process in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the prefetch display lottery tables 1 and 2 in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of the predetermined number non-arrival in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of predetermined number arrival in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the prefetch display lottery tables 3 and 4 in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pending | holding number command reception process in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating another example of the process at the time of predetermined number arrival in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the character of each step of the staged effect in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the effect in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, invention of each following embodiment is an invention aiming at performing various production | presentation using the start memory display 41b which alert | reports start memory, and improving the interest of a game.

[First Embodiment]
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. There are provided a dish tray outlet 22, a lower dish 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state in which the upper dish 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball striking device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. And fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). A plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, a background image that enhances the effect, and the like are displayed in an area (display area) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. In each of the general winning ports 35,..., Winning port switches 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered each of the general winning ports 35 are arranged.

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) that forms a start winning area for giving a start condition of the special figure changing display game, and a reverse “c” is placed directly below the start winning opening 36. An ordinary variable winning device (general power) 37 having a second start winning opening that includes a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that are opened in a letter shape and are converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and forms a start winning area inside. It is arranged.

  The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

  Further, a special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure changing display game is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Yes.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed state from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). Below the special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 39 for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port.

  Also, outside the game area 32 (for example, at the top of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and the winning for the normal figure start gate 34 are awarded. A collective display device 50 is provided for executing a universal map display game with a trigger at one location.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) for the normal figure fluctuation display game constituted by the LED lamp, and the LED lamp. A memory display unit for informing the start memory number of each variable display game configured is provided. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs, and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and turns on when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short time state. A second game state display unit (second game state display), an error display unit (third game state display) that displays an error that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, A round display section is provided for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed).

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, the numbers “3” and “7”) in a lit state.

  The universal display displays the fact that the light is changing by blinking the lamp during the change. When the game result is “out of”, for example, the lamp is turned off, and when the game result is “hit”, the lamp is turned on to display the game result.

  The special figure 1 holding indicator displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. Specifically, when the number of hold is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of hold is “1”, only lamp 1 is turned on. Further, when the number of holdings is “2”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned on, when the number of holdings is “3”, the lamps 1, 2 and 3 are turned on, and when the number of holdings is “4”, 4 is set. All the lamps 1 to 4 are turned on. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the starting memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, as the special figure 1 hold indicator. Display in the same way.

  The general map hold indicator displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the general map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of hold is “2”, lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of hold is “3”, lamp 1 is blinked, lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of hold is “4”. Lamps 1 and 2 are blinked.

  For example, the first game state indicator turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state indicator turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the time-short state occurs.

  For example, when the jackpot probability state is low when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the error indicator is turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is high when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Turn on the lamp.

  For example, the round display unit turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 39 provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded by the payout control apparatus 200. It is discharged from the controlled dispensing unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, When 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, if it is less than the upper limit of the normal figure start memory number, the general figure start memory number is added (+1) and the general figure start memory number is increased. One figure start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50. In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (specific result) is derived by hitting the common map fluctuation display game.

  The usual map variation display game is executed by a variation display unit (common diagram display) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (normal diagrams, normal symbols) in the lit state, and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. Fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result. Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a specific result, the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). It becomes a state. This makes it easier for a game ball to win a second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the general map start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal symbol display device stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, the normal variation winning device 37 is in a state in which the movable member 37b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the built-in general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3). It is converted and the winning of the game ball is allowed.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively. The game balls won in the start winning opening 36 are detected as start winning balls of the first special figure variable display game, and are stored as a first start memory up to four, and the game balls won in the normal variable winning device 37. Is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to four. In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display section (not shown in FIG. 1 hold display, special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and the center case 40. Is also displayed as a start memory display 41b (see, for example, FIG. 31).

  The game control device 100 uses the special figure indicator (variable display device) 51 or 52 to change the first or second special figure on the basis of the winning entry to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the start memory thereof. Play a display game. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41 (fluctuation display apparatus) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game. It has come to be. As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode, a special game state (so-called big hit state) ) Correspondingly, the display mode (stop result mode) of the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is first changed into the left fluctuation display region (first special symbol) and the right variation display region (second special display). In each of the symbols) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a varying manner (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game by the stop result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as a background and character display corresponding to the set display mode. There are several types of display modes, such as the type of background displayed, the type of character, and the execution mode of the variable display game. Each display mode can recognize which display mode the player is in. It is very different.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count The switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. A micro switch having a mechanical contact is used for the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like. be able to.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (starting winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern selection table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern selection table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The fluctuation pattern selection table includes a loss fluctuation pattern selection table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a second half variation pattern selection table and a first half variation pattern selection table.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device proceeds and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state. And this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special results is different (the reliability is different). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determining random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various reach and reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display with no change), a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game, and the like from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal), a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  In addition, the CPU 111A can select any of a plurality of variation pattern selection tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process described later. A single variation pattern selection table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the start memory number, etc., one of the variation pattern selection tables is selected from a plurality of variation pattern selection tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern selection table among the plurality of variation pattern selection tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, and a general winning port. An interface which is connected to the switches 35a to 35n and the count switch 38a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. A chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. In addition, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 122. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the signals from the count switch 38a are taken in via the data bus 140. A second input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The data held by the second input port 122 is read by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is provided to the output unit 130 so that a signal cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variation winning device 38 (a large winning opening solenoid) 38b and a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c to open a movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. The third output port 135 for outputting the opening / closing data of the LED and the ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal, and a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 are provided. It has been. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the external information terminal 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal installed in a game store or a game hall internal management device (not shown).

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b output from the third output port 135, and receives the solenoid driving signal and the opening / closing data signal of the power solenoid 37c to generate the solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a for outputting, a second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136 The external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the external information A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the terminal 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. The third driver 138c that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential extracts the current via the segment line from the cathode terminal. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. The sound source LSI 314 for controlling the sound output is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and a sound ROM 324 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, a serial system is used between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A variation start command, a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, an error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are used as an effect control command signal. Receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 42 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the front frame 12. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41), a motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, the moving device) A frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling the light 45 is provided. Note that these control circuits 332 to 335 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 304.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an on / off state of a switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and an effect motor switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 19b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time. The opening control is performed as described above (for example, for 0.3 seconds). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. . Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds or 1 second) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until one round is defined as one round, and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 or 2 times). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short time state as a game state after the special game state is ended based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the short time state, the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal time change time) is controlled to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time. (For example, 10 seconds is 1 second). Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 0. The second opening time (for example, 1.93 seconds) that is longer than 3 seconds) is controlled. In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is not equal to the first number of times of opening for one time with respect to the result of one hit of the normal figure changing display game. Is set to the second number of times of opening a plurality of times (for example, 3 times). Further, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variation display game (normal probability) is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. In the short-time state, the time for changing the state of the normal variation winning device 37 to the open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the number of times of normal power release, the time of normal power release, and the probability of normal time change. May be extended more than usual.

  The high-probability state and the short-time state described above can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously, or only one can be generated. In the following description, the short state at this time may be referred to as a state with general power support.

  Although the details will be described later, in the game control apparatus 100, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game that is the predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as the specific variation pattern. The specific variation pattern in this embodiment is a reach state. Then, in a state where the predetermined start memory for executing the special figure variation display game has not yet occurred, a prior notification suggesting information related to the execution of the special figure variation display game based on the predetermined start memory Is supposed to do.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a display mode based on the game state. The game state includes a state relating to the execution of the game, such as whether or not it is a high probability state, whether or not it is a short-time state, whether or not to clearly notify that it is a high probability state, a specific variation mode This includes situations where the possibility of selecting (reach and pseudo-variation) is different, and states relating to effects such as mere effects. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 determines in advance a display mode of the special figure variation display game that is a predetermined number of times after the special game state is ended, and has a predetermined start memory for executing the special figure variation display game. In a state where it has not occurred yet, a prior notification that suggests information related to the setting of the display mode in the special figure variation display game based on the predetermined start-up memory is performed.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs is first performed after an interrupt prohibition process (step S1). S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt mode setting process (step S4) for setting an interrupt processing mode. )I do.

  Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 200 to start up normally, for example, a time of 4 msec is waited (step S5). As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to. Thereafter, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted, and all output ports are set to OFF (no output) (steps S6 and S7). In addition, the serial port ((port previously installed in the gaming microcomputer 111) is not used in this embodiment because it is in parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300). Processing is performed (step S8).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is turned on (step S9). If it is determined that the initialization switch is off (step S9; No), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S10). (Step S11; Yes), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (Step S12). Next, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S13; Yes), the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is calculated (step S14), and the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power interruption are calculated. Compare (step S15) and determine whether they match (step S16). And when it corresponds (step S16; Yes), it transfers to step S17 of FIG. 6, and performs the process at the time of recovering normally from a power failure.

  When the initialization switch is determined to be on (step S9; Yes), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S11; No or step S13; No), the checksum Is determined to be not normal (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing.

  In step S17 of FIG. 6, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the area related to error and fraud monitoring is reset (step S19). Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

  If it is determined in step S20 that the probability is high (step S20; Yes), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and the high probability notification LED (for example, provided in the batch display device 50) The ON (lighted) data of the error indicator is saved in the segment area (step S22). And the process (step S23) which transmits the command at the time of the power recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is performed (step S23), and it progresses to step S29 .

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S25), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S26). And the time value of the period which outputs the external information regarding RWM clear is set (step S27), the command at the time of power-on is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 (step S28), and it progresses to step S29. In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

  The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Then, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are changed to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2) Then, after saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), the interruption is permitted (step S32). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number (big hit random number) generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a soft random number generated by software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and the power failure monitoring signal is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S35; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state for the number of checks set in step S34 (step S36). And when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S36; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (step S36; Yes), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S37), all A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S38) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step S39), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step S40). Further, after performing the process of calculating the checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S41) and the process of saving the checksum (step S42), the process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43) is performed. Wait until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111A, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S51) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, an input process (step S52) for taking in inputs from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, count switch 38a, etc.), that is, reading the state of each input port. )I do. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening SOL38b, general electric power SOL37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a command transmission process (step S54), a random number update process 1 (step S55), and a random number update process 2 (steps) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. S56) is performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a... 35n, and the count switch 38a. A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process relating to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process relating to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays various types of information related to display of special figure variation games and games, to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 And the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62 and determines whether there is any abnormality is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S62) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S63), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S64), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S64) Step S65) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S58) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the special figure game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a count switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this count switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, the special figure game process timer is updated (-1), and it is checked whether the game process timer has already expired or has been expired (step A3). If it is determined that the timer has timed up (step A4; Yes), a process (step A5) for setting a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed. Then, the process (step A6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed using the table. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. The details of the special figure routine process (step A9) will be described later.

  In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed. If the game processing number is “2” in step A8, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like. In the special figure display process (step A11), the number of executions of the special figure variable display game from the end of the special game state is also counted.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (step A16), the design fluctuation control concerning the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. A process (step A17) is performed and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A117.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (step A114), processing for determining whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determination (step A115). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

  If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; No), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A116). ), Special chart start port common processing (step A117) is performed, and start port switch monitoring processing is terminated. If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special start port switch common process (steps A112 and A117) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the special drawing start port switch common process, first, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, an input is made to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a, etc.). Is checked (step A201), and if it is determined that there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; Yes), the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch is saved (step A203).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times output (start port signal output number) is loaded (step A204). Then, the start port signal output count is updated by +1, and it is checked whether the output count overflows (step A205). If it is determined that the number of outputs does not overflow (step A206; No), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal output number area (step A207), and the process proceeds to step A208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A206 that the number of outputs overflows (step A206; Yes), the process proceeds to step A208.

  Then, in step A208, the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch (for example, the starter 1 switch 36a) among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a. Is checked whether it is less than the upper limit (step A208), and processing for determining whether the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A209) is performed.

  When it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A209; Yes), a process of updating (+1) the special figure hold number (for example, special figure 1 hold number) to be updated (step 1) A210) is performed. And after preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) of the start port switch (for example, start port 1 switch 36a) to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A211), A decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A212), and a command setting process (step A213) is performed. Subsequently, processing for calculating the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the number of special figure hold (step A214) is performed to extract and prepare the big hit random number (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number saving area of the RWM. (Step A216).

  Next, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the big hit symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the corresponding variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the RWM random number save area (steps A219, A220, A221). Note that the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation that is the fluctuation after reaching the reach state, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 performs distribution of detailed effects from the reach system. It is a random number for. The fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half fluctuation that is the fluctuation before reaching the reach state.

  Then, before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, a special figure hold information determination process (step A222) which is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory is performed. In the special figure hold information determination process, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory, the variation pattern, and the like are determined. Then, a start opening prize winning design command including information relating to the result mode of the special figure variation display game and a starting opening prize winning effect command including information relating to the variation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. By changing the start memory display 41b displayed on the display device 41, it becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 stores the second predetermined random number (big hit random number) related to the establishment of the special result among the predetermined random numbers stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100). Pre-result determination means for determining before execution of the variable display game based on the above. The prior result determination means is a jackpot random number for determining the type of the special result in addition to the jackpot random number for determining whether or not the special result stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means, It can be said that the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern (variation mode) of the variation display game is determined before the variation display game based on the start-up memory is executed.

  Thereafter, the target start slot winning flag is loaded as a change order flag for storing the execution order of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game (step A223), and is added to the total number of special figure holds. The address of the corresponding change order flag save area is calculated (step A224). Further, the change order flag is saved in the change order flag saving area (step A225), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A209; No), a decorative special figure hold number command (overflow command) is prepared (step A226), and a command setting process (step A227). ) To complete the special figure start port switch common process.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory) are 0 (step). A301). If it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether the customer waiting demonstration has already been started (step A303). If it is determined that the waiting demonstration has not started, that is, has not been started (step A304; No), processing for setting a customer waiting demo flag during the customer waiting demonstration (step A305) is performed. Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A306), a command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure routine process is terminated. If it is determined in step A304 that the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A304; Yes), the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A302 that either the special figure 1 holding number or the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (step A302; No), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. The change order flag is loaded from the change order flag saving area in which the execution order is stored (step A308), and it is checked whether the change order flag is a flag indicating the start of change in the special figure 1 (first special figure change display game) ( Step A309).

  And when it is a change start of special figure 1 (1st special figure change display game) (step A310; Yes), a special figure 1 change start process is performed (step A311), and a special figure usual process is complete | finished. In addition, when it is not the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (first special figure fluctuation display game) (step A310: No), that is, when the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (second special figure fluctuation display game), it is A variation start process is performed (step A312), and the special figure routine process is terminated. Thus, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order stored.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A311) in the special figure usual process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set (step A321).

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A322) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), it corresponds to the special figure 1 stop symbol number of the set special figure 1 stop symbol. The test signal is saved (step A323). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern information (symbol information) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information area for work of the RWM (step A324).

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A325), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A326). Subsequently, a target table for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step A327), and special figure information setting processing (step A328) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A329) for setting the latter half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step A330) is performed.

  Then, the fluctuation start information setting process (step A331) for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended. In the variation start information setting process (step A331), the variation pattern command including information related to the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the decoration special diagram variation display game. A decoration special figure 1 hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the start memory display 41b displayed on the command and display device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  In the special figure 1 change start process, information related to a display mode that suggests a gaming state in a change display game is determined. This process is performed, for example, in a variation pattern setting process or a variation start information setting process. At this time, the display mode to be set is basically determined based on the gaming state, but when the display mode to be set by the special effect information is designated in advance, the display mode is determined accordingly. In addition, it is also possible to set a display mode suitable for the variation pattern and result of the variation display game every time the variation display game is started. Information regarding the display mode determined here is also transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A312) in the special figure normal process is performed with the processing target as the second start-up memory, the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is performed, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is started. Processing is to be performed. The details of each process included in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described below, but the same process in which the process target is the second start-up memory is also performed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is checked whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A341), and if it is a big hit (step A342; Yes), the big hit symbol of special figure 1 is displayed. A table is set (step A343), and the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) (step A344). Next, a stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired and prepared (step A345), and the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A346). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, it is determined whether the power transmission is being supported (in the specific gaming state) (step A347). If the power transmission is being supported (step A347; Yes), the special figure 1 big hit stop at high probability and short time A symbol information table is prepared (step A348), and a stop symbol information setting process (step A350) for setting the execution mode of the special game state according to the type of the special result mode and setting the game after the special game state ends. I do. If the power transmission support is not in progress (step A347; No), a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability is prepared (step A349), and stop symbol information setting processing (step A350) is performed. Thereafter, a process for setting a decoration special figure command table (step A353) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step A342; No), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A351), and the symbol information at the time of loss is saved in the symbol information area (step A352). . And the process (step A353) which sets a decoration special figure command table is performed. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After performing the process of setting the decorative figure command table (step A353), the decorative special figure command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A354), and the decorative special figure 1 command (MODE) is set. (Step A355), the command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (Step A356). This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0 (step A357), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Stop symbol information setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol information setting process (step A350) performed when the result is a big hit in the above-described special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the stop symbol information setting process, first, the symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area (step A361). At this time, since the different stop symbol information table is used depending on whether or not the power transmission is being supported, even if the same stop symbol number is used, the symbol information acquired depending on whether or not the power transmission is being supported It is possible to make it difficult to infer the type of jackpot from the display on the special figure 1 display 51 and the display on the display device 41.

  Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A362). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state. Thereafter, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A363), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A364).

  Then, the special effect information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special effect information area (step A365), and the stop symbol information setting process is terminated. In the process of acquiring special effect information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saving it in the special effect information area (step A365), the stop symbol number is referred to the special effect information selection table shown in FIG. Any one of the special information 1 to 4 is selected or no special information is selected.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the case of a probable big hit that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, it is set to a short time state until the next big hit, and becomes a normal probability state after the end of the special gaming state. Normally, in the case of big hit, the time is shortened until a special figure variation display game is executed 100 times at maximum. The special effect information is selected only in the case of a normal jackpot that is in a normal probability state after the special game state ends, and the switching timing of the variation pattern selection table and the display mode change timing associated therewith are also maximum. It is made after the time-short state that can be set until 100 special figure variation display games are executed. This prevents advance notification of the start-up memory that has not yet occurred in a time-saving state in which it is easy to win a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37. This is a short-time state in which it is easy to win a game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and even if a prior notification is given to the start memory that has not yet occurred, the corresponding start memory is immediately generated and the prior notification is terminated. This is because the period for performing prior notification is shortened. Of course, start-up memory that is subject to prior notification may be generated during the time-short state.

  In the special effect information, the timing for switching the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game and the type of the variation pattern selection table set at the time of switching are defined. Further, display mode types that are set corresponding to changes in the gaming state (changes in the variation pattern) due to the switching of the variation pattern selection table are defined. For example, in the case of the special information 1, information indicating that the change pattern selection table is switched from normal use to special 1 is specified for the special figure change display game which is the 120th time after the end of the special game state. Information for switching to special 1 is defined. Note that as the types of switching timings increase to make the pattern more complicated, the player becomes less likely to analogize the switching timings, and the interest can be further enhanced.

  16 to 20 show variation pattern selection tables. The variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 16 is a variation pattern selection table used in a normal time when the variation patterns selection tables 1 to 4 are not used. When this variation pattern selection table is used and the result is a big hit, only the variation pattern that reaches the reach state is selected. When the result is out of order, all the variation patterns including the variation pattern without reach can be selected.

  The variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 17 is a special 1 variation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern selection table, only the variation pattern that reaches the reach state can be selected regardless of the result. Therefore, when the special information 1 is set as the special effect information, the special 1 fluctuation pattern selection table is used for the 120th special figure fluctuation display game after the special gaming state is finished. Then, you will always reach a state. For this reason, prior to the occurrence of the start memory for executing the 120th special-figure display game, it is possible to make a prior notification about the start memory (for example, notification that the reach state is reached). In this case, it is set in advance that the special 1 display mode is set for the special figure variation display game which is 120th after the end of the special game state by the special effect information. For this reason, prior to the occurrence of the start memory for executing the 120th special figure variation display game, it is possible to make a prior notification about the start memory (for example, notification that the special 1 display mode is set). It becomes.

  FIG. 18 shows a special 2 variation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern selection table, only the variation pattern that is in the SP1 reach state can be selected regardless of the result. Furthermore, in the special 3 variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 19, only the variation pattern that is in the SP2 reach state can be selected regardless of the result. In the special 4 variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Regardless, only the variation pattern that is in the SP3 reach state can be selected. A plurality of these variation pattern selection tables may be prepared for each gaming state, for each start memory number, and the like. Further, in these cases, the display mode (special 2) corresponding to the change pattern selection table to be switched is used for the special figure change display game which is the predetermined number of times that the change pattern selection table is changed after the special game state is ended by the special effect information. 3 or 4) is set in advance. For this reason, prior to the occurrence of the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times, a prior notification about the start memory (for example, a notification that the display mode of special 2, 3 or 4 is set) ) Can be performed.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A328) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure information setting process, first, the prepared flag (here, special figure 1 variation flag) is saved in the symbol discrimination flag (work) area as a flag indicating the target special figure (step A371). ).

  Next, as the information generation parameter 1, the target special figure hold number is loaded (step A372), and it is determined whether the power transmission is being supported (during time reduction) (step A373). If the power generation support is not in progress (during the short time state) (step A373; No), the special effect information is loaded as the information generation parameter 2 (step A374), and the value without the general power support is set as the information generation parameter 3 (Step A375). Further, when the power transmission is being supported (during time reduction) (step A373; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure variation display game has a high probability (step A376). A376; No) sets, as the information generation parameter 3, a value with low probability and support for ordinary power transmission (step A377). When the probability is high (step A376; Yes), the information generation parameter 3 is set to a value with high probability and normal power support (step A378).

  After the information generation parameters 1 to 3 are set by the above processing, the first half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3 and saved in the first half fluctuation information 1 area (step A379). The first half fluctuation information 2 is generated based on the first half fluctuation information 2 and saved in the first half fluctuation information 2 area (step A380). The first half variation information is information for determining the first half variation pattern until reaching the reach state among the variation patterns. The first half fluctuation information 1 is first half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and the reach state is not reached. The first half variation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3 because the first half variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure reservations. The first half fluctuation information 2 is first half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and the reach state is reached or when the result is a big hit. In the first half fluctuation information 2, the first half fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure reservation number. It should be noted that at the time when the first half fluctuation information 1 and 2 are generated, which is used is not determined, and is determined with reference to other information generation parameters later.

  Next, as the information generation parameter 4, symbol information (for work) that is information related to the symbol in the case of a loss or a big hit is loaded (step A 381), and the special symbol variation display game is executed as the information generation parameter 5. A symbol determination flag (for work), which is information on which of the special drawings 1 and 2 is loaded, is loaded (step A382).

  Then, first-half variable group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 4 and 5, and saved in the target first-half variable group information area (step A383). Thereby, it is determined which of the first half variation information 1 and 2 is used. Thereafter, the latter-half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameter 1 and saved in the target latter-half fluctuation group information area (step A384). Further, the latter-half fluctuation group selection table based on the information generation parameters 2, 4 and 5 A pointer is generated and prepared (step A385), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

  When information is generated based on the information generation parameter 2, the information is generated in consideration of the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state. That is, any one of the special information 1 to 4 is set as the special effect information forming the information generation parameter 2, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the special game state is determined in advance by the set special information. When the number of times is reached, the value of the variation group selection table pointer is a value for selecting a variation pattern selection table (special 1 to 4) predetermined by the set special information. In addition, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the special gaming state is not the number of times determined in advance by the set special information, it is a value for selecting the variation pattern selection table for normal use. The

[Second half fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A329) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the latter half variation pattern setting process, first, the address of the variation group selection table corresponding to the variation group selection table pointer is calculated and prepared (step A391).

  Then, it is checked whether the symbol information (for work) is out of symbol information (step A392). If it is not out of symbol information (step A393; No), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared. (Step A396). If it is out-of-order symbol information (step A393; Yes), the latter-half variation group information is loaded from the target latter-half variation group information area (step A394). Further, an address corresponding to the latter half fluctuation group information is additionally calculated and prepared as a fluctuation group selection table (step A395), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A396). As a result, the variation pattern selection table can be made different depending on whether it is a big hit or not.

  Thereafter, a 2-byte sorting process (step A397) is performed, and the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step A398). Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A399), and a sorting process (step A400) is performed to obtain the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting (step A401). Thereafter, the latter half variation number is saved in the target latter half variation number area (step A402), and the latter half variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Through such processing, any of the special information 1 to 4 is set as the special effect information, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the special game state is ended is predetermined by the set special information. When the number of times is reached, a variation pattern selection table (special 1 to 4) predetermined by the set special information is selected. As a result, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, which is a predetermined number of times with the set special information, can be a variation pattern predetermined with the special information. It is also possible to set in advance the display mode of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern selection table is switched by setting the special effect information.

  From the above, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start winning storage unit (game control device 100). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution mode control unit that controls the execution mode of the variable display game based on a predetermined random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern used for executing the variation display game based on the first predetermined random number (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game information determination unit that determines information related to the execution of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determining unit that determines information related to the execution of the variable display game executed based on the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred by setting the special effect information. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as display mode information determining means for determining information related to a display mode that suggests a gaming state in a variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determining unit that determines information related to the setting of the display mode in the variable display game executed based on the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the big hit end process, first, it is checked whether the probability variation determination flag is a high probability entry flag (step A411). The high probability entry flag is a flag that is set when a special result that sets the probability state to the high probability state is selected. When the probability variation determination flag is not the high probability entry flag (step A412; No), that is, when the normal probability state is reached after the special gaming state is ended, the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A413). When the probability variation determination flag is a high probability entry flag (step A412; Yes), that is, when the high probability state is reached after the special gaming state is ended, the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A414).

  After performing the jackpot end setting process 1 or 2, a probability information command corresponding to the probability variation determination flag is prepared (step A415), and the command setting process is performed (step A416). Further, the special effect information is loaded and saved in the command transmission area (step A417), and command setting processing is performed (step A418). Thereby, the information regarding the probability information and the special effect information is transmitted to the effect control device 300. And the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3 is performed (step A419), and the big hit end process is complete | finished. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A419), a process for setting the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) for defining the special prize fraud monitoring period, etc. Do.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 24 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A413) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A421), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A422).

  Next, the number of the time is saved in the game state display number area (step A423), and the common figure high probability and the ordinary power support flag are saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A424). Then, the low probability and short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A425), and the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A426). Further, the special effect information is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A427), the initial value of the hourly fluctuation number is saved in the hourly fluctuation number area (step A428), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 25 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A414) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start at high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A431), and a signal related to the start at high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A432). ).

  Next, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A433), and the high figure probability and the general power support flag are saved in the usual game mode flag area (step A434). Then, the high probability and short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A435), and the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A436). Thereafter, the short time variation count area is reset (step A437), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result is generated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a probability control means for setting a probability state in which a special result occurs to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. In addition, the game control device 100 extends an open time extended state in which the time for the state change of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) to the open state is extended over a predetermined period after the special game state ends. The open time extended state generating means for generating (short time state) is provided.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. As described above, the effect control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311.

[1st main processing]
The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 performs the 1st main process shown in FIG. In this 1st main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As processing at the time of starting the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step B11), the RAM is cleared to 0 (step B12), and a CPU initialization process (step B13) for initializing the CPU is performed. Next, an initial value of the RAM is set (step B14), random number initialization processing (step B15) for initializing random numbers is performed, timers for various interrupts are started (step B16), and interrupts are permitted (step B16). B17).

  Next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B18), and an effect button input process (step B19) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . Thereafter, a game control command analysis process (step B20) is performed. In this game control command analysis process (step B20), it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 has been correctly received. Processing to classify commands for processing.

  Next, a test mode process (step B21), which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like, is performed. When the test mode is set by the test mode process (step B21), the subsequent game-related processes are not performed. However, in the test mode, when performing display on the display device 41, output of sound from the speaker, light emission of the LED of the decoration device, operation of the effect device, etc., control is performed in a process for controlling these. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine is powered off.

  And the 1st scene control process (step B22) regarding control of the effect of a game is performed. Details of the 1st scene control process (step B22) will be described later. Next, based on an error notification command transmitted from the gaming control device 100 when an error occurs in the gaming machine, a gaming machine error monitoring process (step B23) for performing a corresponding notification is performed. In addition, the display on the display device 41 for performing the corresponding notification, the sound output from the speaker, the light emission of the LED of the decoration device, the operation of the effect device, and the like are controlled in a process for controlling these.

  Thereafter, an effect command editing process (step B24) for editing a command to be output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 is performed, and a sound control process for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b). (Step B25) is performed. Next, a decoration control process for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 18 (step B26), a motor / SOL control process for controlling the motors and solenoids of the panel effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 (step) B27) is performed. And the random number update process (step B28) which updates the random number which determines the detail of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and it returns to the process (step B18) which clears WDT.

[1st scene control processing]
FIG. 27 shows the 1st scene control process (step B22) in the 1st main process shown in FIG. In this 1st scene control process, first, it is determined whether or not the test mode is in effect (step B61). If the test mode is in effect (step B61; Yes), the 1st scene control process is terminated. When the test mode is not being executed (step B61; No), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step B62).

  The scene change commands are various commands relating to games transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. If this scene change command is received (step B62; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step B63), and it is determined whether the command is a valid command (step B64). In determining whether the command is valid (step B64), it is determined whether the received scene change command is valid for the acquired current game state. If the command is valid (step B64; Yes), the received command is saved (step B65), an effect request flag is set (step B66), and a branch process based on the command identifier of the received command (step B67). )I do.

  On the other hand, when the scene change command has not been received (step B62; No) or when it is not a valid command (step B64; No), branch processing (step B67) based on the command identifier of the received command is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

  In the branch process based on the command identifier (step B67), a process to be executed based on the received command is selected. When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step B68) is performed to perform a process necessary when the power is turned on. Further, when a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than customer waiting) processing (step B69) for performing processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery is performed. When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step B70) for performing processing related to display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, a variation processing (step B71) for performing processing related to the execution of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed. In the process during change (step B71), information necessary for playing the decoration special figure change display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, information included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, mode information, variation pattern information, etc.) Based on this, the production (variation pattern, variation time, etc.) is set. Further, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is ended, the variation display of the identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped, the stop display time is set, and the like.

  When a fanfare command is received, fanfare processing (step B72), which is processing related to the start of the special game state, is performed. In addition, when the large entry / release n-th command is received, an in-round process (step B73), which is a process related to a round game, is performed. When an interval command is received, an interval process (step B74) that is a process related to an interval between rounds is performed. When an ending command is received, an ending process (step B75), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

  After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step B67), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a symbol command reception process (step B76) for performing processing based on a decoration special command including information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is performed, and the decorative special symbol holding including information regarding increase / decrease of the start memory is performed. A pending number command reception process (step B77) for performing processing based on the number commands (special figure 1 pending number command, special figure 2 pending number command) is performed.

  Further, a prefetch command (start opening prize effect command, winning effect symbol command) including a result of a prefetching process for determining the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory in advance before the execution of the special figure variation display game is used. A prefetch command reception process (step B78) for performing a process based on the above is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command reception process (step B79) for performing a process based on a probability information command including information on the probability state is performed, and the 1st scene control process is terminated.

[Hold count command reception processing]
FIG. 28 shows the hold number command reception process (step B77) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In the number-of-holds command reception process, in addition to the process of increasing / decreasing the display of the start memory display 41b in accordance with the increase / decrease of the special figure start memory, a special figure variation display game is executed that is a predetermined number of times with the set special information In a state where the start memory to be generated has not yet occurred, processing related to the prior notification control for performing notification regarding the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is also performed.

  In the hold number command reception process, first, a special figure reservation number command is confirmed (step B81), and it is determined whether a special figure reservation number command has been received (step B82). And when the decoration special figure hold number command is not received (step B82; No), a hold number command reception process is complete | finished. If the decoration special figure hold number command is received (step B82; Yes), it is determined whether the command is an overflow command (step B83).

  If it is an overflow command (step B83; Yes), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If the command is not an overflow command (step B83; No), it is determined whether the target of the decoration hold number command is FIG. 1 (step B84). When the decoration hold number command is the special figure 1 (step B84; Yes), that is, when the decoration hold number command is transmitted based on the increase or decrease of the first start memory, the current special figure 1 hold number storage area Is acquired (step B85), and a value based on the decoration special figure hold number command received this time is acquired (step B86). Next, the difference is calculated to update the value of the special figure 1 hold number storage area (step B87), and the special figure 1 hold number display data is set based on the updated contents (step B88), and the processing when the target hold occurs (Step B93).

  On the other hand, when the object of the decoration hold number command is the special figure 2 (step B84; No), that is, the decoration hold number command transmitted based on the increase / decrease of the second start memory, the current special figure 2 hold number The value in the storage area is acquired (step B89), and the value based on the decoration special figure hold number command received this time is acquired (step B90). Next, the difference is calculated and the value of the special figure 2 hold number storage area is updated (step B91), and the special figure 2 hold number display data is set based on the updated contents (step B92), and processing when the target hold occurs (Step B93).

  With the above processing, the display of the start memory display 41b is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the special figure start memory number (holding number). That is, the effect control device 300 serves as start memory notifying means for recognizing to the player the number of start memories stored in the start winning storage means (game control apparatus 100). The start memory notifying means notifies the player of the start memory number by controlling the display in the start memory display area 41a. It can also be said that the production control device 300 forms a start memory display control means for performing display control of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory stored in the start winning memory means (game control device 100).

  After performing the target hold occurrence process (step B93) for performing the process when the start memory that is the target of prior notification occurs, the normal state is confirmed (step B94), and it is determined whether it is in a predetermined state. Then (step B95), if it is in a predetermined state (step B95; Yes), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If it is not the predetermined state (step B95; No), the special effect information is confirmed as a process related to the setting of the prior notification for the start memory that has not yet occurred (step B96). This predetermined state is a state in which the normal variation display game is won and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. In this state, since a plurality of special figure start memories easily occur, even if a prior notice is given to a start memory that has not yet occurred, a corresponding start memory is immediately generated and the prior notice ends. No advance notification.

  After confirming the special effect information (step B96), it is confirmed whether or not the next hold to be generated is a target for changing the variation pattern selection table (step B97). The special effect information is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the end of the special game state, and the effect control device 300 generates the next by counting the number of executions of the special figure variable display game from the end of the special game state. It is possible to confirm whether the hold to be performed is a target for changing the variation pattern selection table. And when it is not the object of a change (step B98; No), a pending | holding number command reception process is complete | finished. If the change is to be made (step B98; Yes), the advance notice at the time of the occurrence of the hold based on the contents of the change pattern selection table to be changed is set as the advance notice (step B99), and the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold is set. After setting (step B100), the pending number command reception process is terminated.

  In the setting of the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold based on the contents of the change pattern selection table to be changed (step B99), the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold suggesting the contents of the change pattern selection table may be set, or the contents of the display mode are suggested. You may set a notice when a hold occurs. Moreover, a notice at the time of the occurrence of a hold that suggests the contents of both the variation pattern selection table and the display mode may be set. Since there is a relationship between the change pattern selection table to be switched and the set display mode, it is possible to make the other notice by making one notice.

  With the above processing, in the state where the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game having the predetermined number of times with the set special information has not yet occurred, the notification regarding the special figure variation display game based on the start memory has been issued. The prior notification to be performed will be performed. Thereby, even if there is no start-up memory, it is possible to execute a notice for the player, and a novel notice effect can be performed. Further, since the player tries to generate a corresponding start memory, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  That is, the presentation control device 300 suggests information related to the execution of the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory before the occurrence of the predetermined start memory based on the determination of the prior determination means (game control device 100). Based on the notification and the determination of the prior determination means (game control device 100), prior notification that suggests information related to the setting of the display mode in the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory before occurrence of the predetermined start memory It is an executable advance notification means. In addition, the production control device 300 selects one notification mode from a plurality of notification modes as the notification mode of the prior notification for a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred, and the predetermined notification is executed, and the prior notification is executed. And a notification mode selection means.

[Process when target hold occurs]
FIG. 29 shows a process at the time of target hold occurrence (step B93) in the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. In this target hold occurrence process, first, the hold occurrence notice execution flag that is set when prior notification is performed is confirmed (step B111). If the flag is not set (step B112; No), the target hold is set. End processing when it occurs. If it is in the flag set state (step B112; Yes), the state of the on-hold occurrence notice display is confirmed (step B113), and it is confirmed whether the on-hold subject to change of the variation pattern selection table has been generated. (Step B114).

  And when it has not generate | occur | produced (step B115; No), the process at the time of object holding | maintenance generation | occurrence | production is complete | finished. If it has already occurred (step B115; Yes), the display for the change pattern selection table change target hold is switched to the detailed notice display (step B116) and the notice execution flag at the time of the hold occurrence is cleared (step B117). ), When the target hold occurs. The detailed notice display is a display for recognizing the change pattern and the display mode of the special figure change display game executed based on the predetermined start-up memory that is the target of the advance notification so that the player can recognize. By switching to the detailed notice display when the start memory for performing prior notification is generated in this way, a privilege can be given to the player who has generated the start memory, and stoppage can be prevented.

  From the above, when the predetermined start memory corresponding to the prior notification is generated, the prior notification means (production control device 300) stores the predetermined start memory in the start memory display 41b corresponding to the predetermined start memory. The change pattern of the change display game executed on the basis of this is notified so that the player can recognize it. In addition, when a predetermined start memory corresponding to the prior notification occurs, the prior notification means (production control device 300) is executed based on the predetermined start memory in the start memory display 41b corresponding to the predetermined start memory. This means that the player can be notified of the display mode set in the variable display game.

[Fluctuation processing]
FIG. 30 shows the changing process (step B71) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B121). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When this flag is present, processing based on the received command is performed.

  When there is this effect request flag (step B121; Yes), the effect button related information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step B122), and the movable body request set process (step B123) is performed. Next, a variation pattern information setting process (step B124) for setting the execution mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and a random number seed initialization process (step B125) is performed to correspond to the set variation pattern. A scene sequence table is set (step B126). The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display and the display of the effect character in the decoration special figure variable display game. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table. The display mode is also set in the scene sequence table based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100. However, the presentation control device 300 may determine and set the display mode independently.

  After that, a variation time management process (step B127) is performed in which the production control device 300 manages the time period for switching to the short time state, the timing for switching the variation pattern selection table, and the like, and the variation time setting for setting the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game. Processing (step B128) is performed. Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B129), and the on-holding advance notice execution flag that is set when the prior notification is performed is confirmed (step B132).

  On the other hand, when there is no production request flag (step B121; No), it is determined whether the value of the update timer is 0 (step B130). In this case, the update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended. When the value of this update timer is not 0 (step B130; No), the notice execution flag at the time of the occurrence of holding is confirmed (step B132). If the value of this update timer is 0 (step B130; Yes), a scene data setting process (step B131) is performed to check the notice execution flag when a hold occurs (step B132). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the update timer. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a variable display control unit that performs display control of a variable display area in which a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) can be displayed.

  Then, the on-holding advance notice execution flag is confirmed (step B132). If there is no on-hold occurrence notice execution flag (step B133; No), the changing process is terminated. If there is a notice execution flag at the time of the on-hold occurrence (step B133; Yes), update setting is performed according to the progress status of the special figure variation display game (step B134), and the variation processing is ended. By this process, the display mode of the prior notification can be changed according to the progress of the special figure variation display game being executed. At the time of this change, the player changes the display pattern so that the player can easily recognize the variation pattern and the display mode, rather than the display mode of the advance notification being executed. Thereby, since the player tries to generate the start memory in which the prior notification is made early, the stoppage can be suppressed.

  FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 show an example of display on the display device 41. In the examples shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the special information 2 is set as the special effect information, and the variation pattern selection table is used for the normal time for the special diagram variation display game which is the 150th game after the end of the special game state. It is assumed that the display mode is switched to the special 2 by switching from the special mode (see FIG. 18) to the special mode 2 (see FIG. 18).

  In the start memory display area 41a displayed at the bottom of the display area of the display device 41, a start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is displayed. The start memory display 41b corresponds to the oldest start memory at the left end, and moves to the left one by one as the special figure variation display game is started and the start memory is consumed. Yes.

  The special figure fluctuation display game being executed in FIG. 31A is the 146th special figure fluctuation display game counted from the end of the special game state. Then, there is a special figure start memory for executing the 147th and 148th special figure change display games. From this state, when a special figure start memory for executing the 149th special figure fluctuation display game is generated as shown in FIG. 31B, a special figure for executing the 150th special figure fluctuation display game that has not yet occurred. Prior notification is performed in the area where the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is displayed. In this prior notification, a display in which the area where the start memory display 41b is displayed is surrounded by a dotted line, and information relating to the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory (here, “?”) Is displayed in advance. A notification display 41c is displayed. As described above, since the prior notification is performed in the area where the start memory display 41b is displayed, it is possible to effectively notify that something will occur if the start memory is generated.

  The advance notification is started when the special figure start memory for executing the 149th special figure fluctuation display game occurs, and the next occurrence of the hold in the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 28 is changed in the fluctuation pattern selection table. Is started (step B98; Yes). At this time, in the process of setting a notice at the time of holding occurrence based on the contents of the changed variation pattern selection table (step B99), the contents to be displayed as information on the special figure fluctuation display game based on the target special figure start memory (here, "?") Is set.

  The type of display mode for prior notifications displays a message such as “?” Or “what happens?”, And some players cannot understand the content of the information, and the player recognizes the variation pattern and display mode. Displaying the names of difficult things, reach and display modes, and characters appearing in reach and display modes, etc., so that players can almost certainly understand the contents of fluctuation patterns and display modes Various things such as easy-to-recognize notifications are prepared. The notification mode of this prior notification can be changed according to the progress of the special map fluctuation display game being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. When the state is reached, the notification mode is changed from “?” To “reach”. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the notification mode is changed from “reach” to “SP reach” in accordance with the development of the reach state in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed.

  The change of the notification mode is changed so that the player can easily recognize the change pattern of the special figure change display game based on the start-up memory to be notified in advance. That is, in this example, in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory to be notified in advance, the special 2 fluctuation pattern selection table is used, so that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be SP1 reach in advance. . Therefore, first, it is suggested that something happens in the start-up memory as “?” Which is a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize the variation pattern at the start of the prior notification, and then the reach state is set to “reach” as the notification mode. Furthermore, the notification mode is set to “SP reach”, and it is clearly notified that the SP reach is achieved. This change in advance notification changes the notification mode when a predetermined timing is reached in the process of performing update setting in accordance with the progress status of the special figure variation display game in the variation processing shown in FIG. 30 (step B134). Is done.

  In this example, it is determined in advance that the display mode is special 2. However, when the notification mode of the prior notification is changed from “?” To “reach”, any one of the display modes of special 1 to 4 is selected. It is also suggested that the display mode changes to “SP reach” to become a special 2, 3 or 4 display mode. In this display mode change, it is also possible to display the name of the display mode. In this example, “?” Is changed to “special”, and “special 2 or more” or “special 2” is changed. Can be considered. This suggests that reaching “special” results in reach, and suggesting that “special 2 or higher” or “special 2” results in SP reach. That is, the prior notification means displays both the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred and the display mode in the special figure fluctuation display game that has not yet occurred based on the predetermined start memory. Notification is possible.

  In this way, according to the progress of the special figure variation display game, the notification mode of the advance notification being executed is changed to the variation pattern and display mode of the variation display game based on the predetermined start-up memory than the notification mode being executed. Since it switches to the alerting | reporting aspect which a person can recognize easily, stoppage can be suppressed. That is, as the game progresses, the player may stop, but as the advance notice becomes easier to recognize as the game progresses, it will try to generate a start memory that has been given early notice Stopping can be suppressed.

  Further, in the state where the prior notification is performed as shown in FIG. 32A, when the special figure variation display game being executed has a special result, as shown in FIG. The notification mode is switched to the message for the special result. In this case, due to the occurrence of a special result, the special figure start memory that is performing prior notification is no longer the special figure variation display game of the predetermined number of times from the end of the special gaming state, in such a case, By switching the notification mode of the prior notification to a message for the special result, the prior notification can be finished without a sense of incongruity.

  Note that the advance notification display 41c is enlarged as a whole and does not suggest the contents of the special figure start memory corresponding to the advance notification display 41c, but is merely a part of the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed. The prior notification may be terminated without any sense of incongruity. Moreover, when the special figure start memory corresponding to the prior notification has already been generated, it may be notified that the situation has changed due to the generation of the special result.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display device that can execute a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner (see Fig. 1 display) Game machine 51, special figure 2 display 52, display device 41), and a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of stopping the variable display game is a predetermined special result, A start winning storage means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as an execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area, and a start winning Start memory notification means (effect control device 300) for recognizing to the player the number of start memories stored in the storage means, and a variable display game for determining information related to the execution of the variable display game Information determining means (game control device 100), and the variable display game information determining means determines in advance information related to execution of the variable display game executed based on a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred. The start memory notifying means includes information relating to the execution of the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory before the occurrence of the predetermined start memory based on the determination of the prior determination means. This means that there is a prior notification means (effect control device 300) for performing prior notification that suggests.

  In addition, the prior determination unit (game control device 100) can determine the variation pattern of the variation display game in advance, and the prior notification unit suggests the variation pattern of the variation display game executed based on a predetermined start-up memory. The prior notification is performed.

  In addition, the start memory notification means (production control device 300) is a start memory stored in the start winning storage means in the start memory display area 41a set as a part of the display area of the variable display device (display device 41). The corresponding start memory display 41b is displayed every time, and the prior notification means (production control device 300) is in the start memory display area 41a in the area where the start memory display 41b is displayed when a predetermined start memory is generated. Therefore, prior notification is performed.

  Further, the variable display for controlling the execution mode of the variable display game based on the first predetermined random number related to the execution of the variable display game among the predetermined random numbers stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100). There is a game execution mode control means (game control device 100), and the variation display game execution mode control means sets a variation pattern used for executing the variation display game based on the first predetermined random number (game). And a plurality of variation pattern selection tables each including a plurality of variation patterns set so that the selection probabilities are different from each other, and the variation pattern setting means includes a plurality of variation pattern selection tables. Of these, a variation pattern is determined with reference to one of the variation pattern selection tables. Of the dynamic pattern selection table, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the specific variation pattern selection table including only the specific variation pattern, and the predetermining means (the game control device 100) has yet to occur that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As the information related to the execution of the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory that has not been determined, it is determined that the variable display game has a specific variation pattern, and the prior notification means (the effect control device 300) satisfies the predetermined condition. Prior to the occurrence of the predetermined start memory, the change display game executed on the basis of the predetermined start memory is notified in advance that the specific change pattern is obtained.

  In addition, the prior notification means (the production control device 300) selects one notification mode from a plurality of notification modes as a notification mode of the prior notification for a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred, which will satisfy the predetermined condition. In addition, a notification mode selection unit (production control device 300) that performs prior notification is provided, and the notification mode selection unit changes the notification mode of the previous notification being executed according to the progress of the variable display game. In other words, the variation pattern of the variation display game based on the predetermined start-up memory is switched to a notification mode that allows the player to easily recognize.

  In addition, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), a variable display device (see Fig. 1 display 51, In a gaming machine that includes a special figure 2 display 52 and a display device 41) and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of stopping the variable display game is a predetermined special result, Based on the winning of the game ball to the game, a predetermined random number is extracted and stored in the starting prize storage means (game control device 100) for storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as the starting memory as the execution right of the variable display game; The start memory notification means (production control device 300) for recognizing the number of stored start memories to the player in a recognizable manner, and information related to the display mode indicating the game state in the variable display game are determined. Display mode information determining means (game control device 100), and the display mode information determining means relates to display mode setting in a variable display game executed based on a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred. The start memory notifying means is stored in the start winning memory means in the start memory display area 41a set as a part of the display area of the variable display device. The start memory display 41b corresponding to each start memory is displayed, and based on the determination of the pre-determining means, the display mode setting in the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory is generated before the predetermined start memory is generated. It has a prior notification means (production control device 300) capable of executing prior notification indicating information, and the prior notification means is a part of the start storage display area 41a. In the region where the start memory display 41b is displayed when the storage of the starting occurs, the fact that to perform the pre-notification.

  In addition, the prior notification means (production control device 300) selects one notification mode from a plurality of notification modes as a notification mode for the prior notification for a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred, and performs a prior notification. The notification mode selection unit includes a selection unit (production control device 300), and the notification mode selection unit sets the notification mode of the previous notification being executed based on a predetermined start-up memory rather than the notification mode being executed as the variable display game progresses. This means that the display mode set in the variable display game is switched to a notification mode that the player can easily recognize.

  In the above-described embodiment, the change pattern of the special figure change display game based on the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred is determined and notified in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change display is not limited to this. Any information may be used as long as information relating to the execution of the game is notified in advance. For example, information regarding a notice type such as a step-up notice performed at the start of a special figure variation display game, a type of stage (background), a type of characters appearing, a mode type, and the like may be determined and notified in advance. Also good.

  In addition, the prior notification is performed in the start-up storage display area 41a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed in another display area in the display device 41 or another display device. Also, the prior notification execution mode is not limited to display, but may be performed by voice, lamp, LED lighting, or the like.

  Further, in the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 28, it is confirmed whether the next hold to be generated is a change pattern selection table change target (step B97). Prior notification may be started at the time of occurrence of the special figure start memory before the individual. However, as shown in FIG. 31, when the advance notification is displayed in the start memory display area 41a, the start memory display corresponding to the special figure start memory to be changed can be displayed in the start memory display area 41a. Prior notification will be made after the condition is reached.

  Further, when the player stops the game when the prior notification is being performed, the prior notification may be terminated, or the detailed notification display may be switched. The determination as to whether or not the player has quit the game is made based on, for example, whether or not the operation unit 24 is operated, whether or not there is a winning at the start winning opening 36 or the like in a predetermined period, and the like.

  In addition, although the gaming state suggested by the display mode is the occurrence of reach (change in variation pattern), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be suggested that the game state has a high possibility of selecting a specific variation mode (for example, a pseudo-continuous variation mode) in addition to the reach state. Further, a simple gaming state may be suggested. Furthermore, if the high-probability state is not clearly notified, whether or not the suggested gaming state is a high-probability state or whether the state is a high-probability state or not can do. Further, suggesting the gaming state by the display mode includes not only selecting the display mode corresponding to the gaming state but also selecting the display mode corresponding to the gaming state with a predetermined probability. One display mode may be selected corresponding to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the display mode is determined in advance by the game control device 100, but the display mode to be set in the effect control device 300 may be determined in advance based on the special effect information transmitted from the game control device 100. good. That is, the effect control device 300 may serve as display mode information determining means for determining information related to a display mode that suggests a gaming state in a variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 may serve as a pre-determining unit that determines information related to the display mode setting in the variable display game that is executed based on a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred. In addition, the display mode of the special figure variation display game to which the variation pattern selection table is switched is determined in advance, but other display mode changes associated with changes in the gaming state may be determined in advance. .

  Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to start prior notification when a plurality of special figure start memories before the change target special figure start memory is generated.

  FIG. 33 shows the start pattern of the prior notification when the special figure fluctuation display game for switching the fluctuation pattern selection table is the special figure fluctuation display game which is the 150th game from the end of the special game state. In this figure, white circles indicate already stored start memories, and black circles indicate start memories that have occurred this time. A dotted circle indicates a start memory that has not yet occurred.

  For example, pattern numbers 1 to 4 indicate a case where a special figure start memory for executing the 146th special figure fluctuation display game, which is four times before the 150th special figure fluctuation display game to be the table switching target, has occurred. ing. Pattern numbers 1 to 4 are different in the number of special figure start memories that already exist when the special figure start memory for executing the 146th special figure change display game is generated. That is, pattern number 1 shows a case where a special figure start memory for executing the 146th special figure variation display game is generated in a state where there are three special figure start memories, and pattern number 4 shows a state where there is no special figure start memory. The case where the special figure starting memory which performs the 146th special figure fluctuation display game has occurred is shown.

  Similarly, when a special figure start memory for executing the 147th special figure variation display game is generated for pattern numbers 5 to 8, a special figure for executing the 148th special figure variation display game for pattern numbers 9 to 12 is generated. When the start memory is generated, pattern numbers 13 to 15 show the case where the special map start memory for executing the 149th special map change display game has occurred.

  And the execution probability of the prior notification in each case is also determined. For example, in the case of pattern number 1, the prior notification is executed with a probability of 40%. In the case of pattern number 12, prior notification is executed with a probability of 100%. The execution probability of this advance notification is higher when the player is more likely to launch a game ball in order to generate a special chart start memory that is subject to advance notification. Try to be high. That is, in this example, since it is not a short-time state, the special figure start memory is mainly composed only of the first start memory. For example, in the case of pattern number 1, there is a high possibility that an overflow will occur. Since the possibility of launching a game ball is low even if it goes, the execution probability of prior notification is also lowered. On the other hand, in the case of pattern number 16, for example, since there is only one start-up memory, there is a high possibility that a game ball will be fired when prior notification is performed, and the execution probability of prior notification is also increased. In this way, it is possible to improve interest by enabling advance notification over a plurality of startup memories.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In order to perform such control, the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG. 34 is performed instead of the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG. In this hold number command reception process, the process related to the prior notification is different, and when the normal state is not a predetermined state (step B95; No), it is determined whether the advance notice is in progress (preliminary notification is in progress) ( Step B141). If the advance notice is in progress (step B141; Yes), the hold number command reception process is terminated. Further, when the on-hold occurrence is not being announced (step B141; No), the special effect information is confirmed (step B96), and it is confirmed whether the generated start memory is within 5 games until the switching target of the variation pattern selection table. (Step B142).

  When the generated start memory is not within 5 games until the switching target of the variation pattern selection table (step B143; No), the pending number command receiving process is terminated. Further, when the generated start memory is within 5 games until the switching target of the variation pattern selection table (step B143; Yes), the execution of the notice of advance (preliminary notification) is randomly drawn based on the hold state (step B144). .

  Here, it is determined whether or not the generated start memory is within 5 games until the switching target of the variation pattern selection table. Therefore, in the hold number command reception process performed when the start memory number decreases, it is determined that it is not within 5 games (step B143; No) because there is no start memory generated, and the following pre-determination lottery process is performed. I will not. However, the following preliminary determination lottery process may also be performed when the start-up memory decreases.

  In the process (step B144) in which the execution of the advance notice of advance (pre-notification) based on the hold state is checked (step B144), it is confirmed which pattern in FIG. 33 corresponds to the current hold state, and the pre-notification in the corresponding pattern. In accordance with the execution probability, whether or not to perform prior notification is selected by lottery. Then, when the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold (preliminary notification) is not executed (step B145; No), the hold number command receiving process is terminated. Further, when the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold (advance notice) is executed (step B145; Yes), the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold (advance notice) is set (step B146) and the advance notice flag at the occurrence of the hold is set (step B146). B100), the pending number command reception process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 shows an example of execution of the advance notice at the time of the occurrence of the hold for making a prior notification. FIG. 36 shows the display on the display device 41 corresponding to this example. In this example, the special figure variation display game for the 150th time from the end of the special game state is the target of switching of the variation pattern selection table, and the special figure start memory is changed from 0 to 4 during the execution of the 146th special figure variation display game. This is an example. Note that (a) to (c) in FIG. 35 correspond to (a) to (c) in FIG.

  When a special figure start memory for executing the 146th special figure variation display game currently being executed occurs, the state is one of pattern numbers 1 to 4 shown in FIG. Is not selected to perform advance notification. Therefore, in the state where the 146th special figure variation display game is started and there is no special figure start memory (until t1 in FIG. 35), prior notification is not performed. Then, when a special figure start memory for executing the 147th special figure fluctuation display game is generated (t1 in FIG. 35), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform prior notification. The hold state at this time is the state of pattern number 8 shown in FIG. 33, and execution of advance notification is selected with a probability of 80%. However, in this example, execution of advance notification is not selected. Is not done.

  Thereafter, when a special figure start memory for executing the 148th special figure fluctuation display game is generated (t2 in FIG. 35), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform prior notification. The hold state at this time is the state of the pattern number 11 shown in FIG. 33, and the execution of the prior notification is selected with a probability of 80%. Here, the execution of the prior notification is selected. Thereby, prior notification is started, and the prior notification display 41c is displayed as shown in FIG.

  At the start of this prior notification, the 149th special figure fluctuation display game that is the preceding start memory that occurs before the special figure start memory that executes the 150th special figure fluctuation display game that is the switching target of the fluctuation pattern selection table is displayed. The special figure start memory to be executed has not yet occurred. For this reason, in addition to the special figure start memory that is the object of prior notification, the previous start memory that has not yet occurred is also set to the prior notification display 41c that surrounds the area where the start storage display 41b is displayed with a dotted line. Further, with respect to the prior notice for the special figure starting memory for executing the 150th special figure fluctuation display game to be switched in the fluctuation pattern selection table, a display for notifying that some change will occur if the special figure starting memory is generated. (Here, “If you get here…?” Is displayed).

  Thereafter, when a special figure start memory for executing the 149th special figure variation display game is generated (t3 in FIG. 35), as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the prior notice display 41c surrounded by a dotted line is displayed. The start memory display 41b is displayed in the corresponding area. Further, when a special figure start memory for executing the 150th special figure variation display game is generated (t4 in FIG. 35), as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the correspondence displayed in the prior notice display 41c surrounded by a dotted line is displayed. The start memory display 41b is displayed in the area to be played, and information on the fluctuation pattern and display mode of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure start memory is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (d), in the advance notification display 41c about the special figure start memory to be switched in the fluctuation pattern selection table, the fluctuation pattern and display of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure start memory. The mode may be displayed by roulette. In this roulette, multiple variation patterns, display modes, and result information are described for each region, and each region sequentially displays a variation display in which the display color is different from the other regions, and then information to be displayed is displayed. The notification is performed by stopping in a state in which the display color of the displayed area is different, and in FIG. 36 (d), the SP reach is achieved (the display mode is any of special 2, 3 or 4). Is informed.

  From the above, the prior notification means (production control device 300) performs prior notification before the occurrence of the preceding start memory that occurs before the predetermined start memory that has not yet been generated, where the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured to be executable.

  Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first modified example of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification is configured to notify the prefetch result in the same display manner as the prior notification. That is, for the special figure start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect for notifying the pre-read result, the pseudo-pre-notification display 41d similar to the pre-notification display 41c is performed instead of the start storage display 41b.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the special figure hold information determination process shown in FIG. This special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process in which the result related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 37, first, it is checked whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A441). If not satisfied (step A442; No), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . If it is satisfied (step A442; Yes), a big hit determination process (step A443) is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not. Note that the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect may be that the special game state (big hit) is not being executed, or that the pre-reading effect is not executed in advance, but a configuration in which no conditions are provided may be used. .

  If the determination result is a big hit (step A444; Yes), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A445), the big hit symbol random number is checked, and the corresponding big hit symbol information table is set. Is performed (step A446). Thereafter, the symbol information is acquired from the set information table, and the process of saving in the symbol information (work) area (step A448) is performed. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A444; No), a loss information table is set (step A447), symbol information is acquired from the set information table, and saved in the symbol information (work) area ( Step A448) is performed.

  After obtaining the symbol information from the set information table and performing the process of saving in the symbol information (work) area (step A448), the start opening prize design symbol command is obtained from the set information table and the start opening prize is received. The effect symbol command is saved in the winning effect symbol command area of the RWM (step A449). Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, after preparing the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A450), the target start port winning effect command setting table is prepared (step A450). Step A451). And the special figure information setting process (step A452) which sets the special figure information set regarding the start port of the said monitoring object is performed.

  Subsequently, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A453) for setting the latter half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern setting process (step A453) for setting the variation aspect of the special figure variation display game ( Step A454) is performed. Note that the special figure information setting process in step A452, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step A453, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A454 are the special figure information setting process, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern in the special figure ordinary process, respectively. This is the same as the setting process.

  Then, the start opening prize effect command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number of the set variation pattern is calculated and prepared (step A455), and the latter half variation number value is prepared as the start opening prize effect command (ACTION). (Step A456), command setting processing (Step A457) is performed. Subsequently, a start opening winning effect command command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step A458), a command setting process (step A459) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. That is, the start opening prize effect command is prepared in steps A455 and A456, and the start opening prize effect symbol command is prepared in step A458, so that the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory is obtained. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, in particular, by changing the start memory display 41b displayed on the display device 41, etc. It is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 stores the second predetermined random number (big hit random number) related to the establishment of the special result among the predetermined random numbers stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100). Pre-result determination means for determining before execution of the variable display game based on the above. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In addition, the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 38 is performed instead of the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. In this pending number command reception process, when an overflow command is received (step B83; Yes), a process for clearing update delay information is performed (step B151), and the pending number command reception process is terminated.

  In addition, a prefetch reflection process (step B152) is performed as a process related to prior notification. As shown in FIG. 39, in the prefetch reflection process, first, it is confirmed whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, start opening prize presentation symbol command) corresponding to the latest received special figure pending number command has been received ( Step B161).

  If the prefetch command has not been received (step B162; No), the prefetch reflection process is terminated. Note that the prefetch command is not received even when the start memory number decreases, so the prefetch reflection processing is terminated. If the prefetch command has been received (step B162; Yes), the command content is confirmed (step B163), and it is determined whether the prefetch result is a big hit (step B164).

  If the prefetch result is not a big hit (step B164; No), it is determined whether the prefetch result is SP reach 3 (step B170). If it is not SP reach 3 (step B170; No), the prefetch reflection process is terminated. . If it is SP reach 3 (step B170; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition for executing the following pre-reading effect processing is satisfied (step B165). On the other hand, if the prefetching result is a big hit (step B164; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (step B165).

  If the predetermined condition is not satisfied (step B165; No), the prefetch reflection process is terminated. For example, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, for example, when the start memory display 41b is not displayed on the display device 41 during SP reach, or when a plurality of start memories are continuously generated, Is a predetermined number or less (for example, two or less). If the predetermined condition is satisfied (step B165; Yes), update delay lottery of the start memory display 41b is performed (step B166), and it is determined whether to delay the display of the start memory display 41b (step B166). B167).

  When the display delay of the start memory display 41b is not executed (step B167; No), the prefetch reflection process is terminated. When delaying the display of the start memory display 41b (step B167; Yes), update delay information for the corresponding special figure hold number display data is set (step B168), and overflow information is cleared (step B168). B169), the prefetch reflection process is terminated.

  By setting the update delay information of the corresponding special figure hold number display data, the corresponding start memory display 41b is hidden, and the pseudo advance notification display 41d is displayed instead. This update delay information is cleared when an overflow prize is received and an overflow command is received (step B83; Yes) as described above. When the update delay information is cleared, the corresponding start memory display 41b is displayed. However, if an overflow prize is generated in succession to the special figure start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect and the update delay information is set, the start memory display 41b is immediately displayed and the display is delayed. The meaning is lost. For this reason, in the prefetch reflection process, the process of clearing the overflow information (step B169) is performed so that the start memory display 41b is not immediately displayed.

  FIG. 40 shows an example in which the display of the start memory display 41b is delayed. FIG. 41 shows the display on the display device 41 corresponding to this example. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the state where there are three special figure start memories, a special figure start memory that has been determined to be a big hit in the prefetch process has occurred (t11 in FIG. 40). The display delay of the start memory display 41b is set for the special figure start memory. Note that (a) to (c) in FIG. 40 correspond to (a) to (c) in FIG. 41.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the pseudo advance notification display 41d is displayed corresponding to the special figure start memory (from t11 to t12 in FIG. 40). That is, as shown in FIG. 40, in this state, the number of special figure starting memories is 4, but the number of special figure starting memories 41b displayed on the display device 41 is three. In addition, the notification state of the information related to the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start storage stored in the pseudo advance notification display 41d is set as an ambiguous notification. This is a state in which the fluctuation pattern and result of the special figure fluctuation display game are not clearly notified, for example, “!” As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the display on the storage display unit for notifying the start memory number in the collective display device 50 is a display corresponding to the actual special figure start memory number.

  When an overflow winning is generated (t12 in FIG. 40), the display is changed from the pseudo advance notification display 41d to the start storage display 41b as shown in FIG. 41 (c). Furthermore, the notification state of the information regarding the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is set as a specific notification. This is a state that suggests the variation pattern and result of the special figure variation display game more clearly than in the case of vague notification, and is, for example, a display of “hot” as shown in FIG. In addition, you may make it perform notification of big hit clearly. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), a special result is derived in the special figure variation display game.

  In this way, it is possible to make a pre-reading notice about the start memory that has already occurred like a prior notice for a start memory that has not yet occurred. The expectation of prior notification can be enhanced.

  From the above, among the predetermined random numbers stored as starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100), the second predetermined random number (big hit random number) related to the establishment of the special result is changed based on the starting memory. A start result determining means (game control device 100) for determining before execution of the display game is provided, and the start memory notifying means (production control device 300) is determined to be determined by the prior result determining means that the special result is derived. It is possible to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the memory, and the prior notification means (the effect control device 300) is in an area used when the start memory display 41b that is not displayed is displayed. Thus, the player can perform recognizable notification that the notification is similar to the previous notification.

  Although the condition for canceling the delay of the start memory display 41b is the occurrence of an overflow prize, it may be canceled when a predetermined time elapses or the next special figure start memory is generated. Moreover, it becomes difficult to recognize that it is delayed by making it difficult to understand the generation timing of the special figure start memory that is the target of delay of the display of the start memory display 41b, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. As a method for making it difficult to understand the generation timing of the special figure start memory, for example, a display that attracts the player's attention on the display device 41 or the rendering device based on the detection of the game ball on the stage (for example, a flashy rendering) Or strong light irradiation).

  In addition, when a special figure start memory that has not yet occurred at an arbitrary timing is notified in advance and a special figure start memory corresponding to the prior notification is generated, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed. May be delayed. In particular, when such a display is performed in a high-probability state, it is highly effective that the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory that has been arbitrarily notified in advance is likely to be a big hit.

  In the prefetching process, if the game state changes due to the execution of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure starting memory prior to the special figure starting memory that is the target of the prefetching process, the game after the change You may make it perform the prefetch process in a state. The change in the gaming state is a change in the probability state, a change in the variation pattern selection table, or the like.

  Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the second modified example of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification can execute, as a prior notice, a placement instruction pattern for designating the order of generation of the first start memory and the second start memory, and when a special figure start memory is generated as specified, Benefits are given to the person.

  FIG. 42 shows the start pattern of the prior notification when the special figure fluctuation display game for switching the fluctuation pattern selection table is the special figure fluctuation display game which is the 150th game from the end of the special game state. Among these, in the pattern numbers 3, 4 and 8, it is possible to select execution of the sorting instruction pattern in which the generation order of the first start memory and the second start memory is specified. Other pattern numbers are the same as those in FIG.

  When execution of the hitting instruction pattern is selected, a hitting mode is selected based on the hitting pattern selection table shown in FIG. For example, when the hitting pattern 1 is selected, it is instructed to generate the special figure start memory in the order of special figure 1 (first start memory), special figure 2 (second start memory), and special figure 1. . At this time, the hitting instruction is set so that the last special figure start memory to which the hitting is designated becomes the special figure start memory to be switched in the variation pattern selection table. And when special figure start memory occurs according to the categorizing instruction, information about the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure start memory to be switched in the fluctuation pattern selection table as a privilege (fluctuation pattern, display mode, result, etc.) Is notified.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In order to perform such control, the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG. In this hold number command reception process, when determining whether or not to execute the hold instruction (preliminary notification) (step B145), when executing the sort instruction pattern, executing the hold occurrence notification (preliminary notification) Determine (Step B145; Yes). Then, when it is determined to execute the advance notice (preliminary notification) at the time of occurrence of the hold (step B145; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the allocation instruction pattern (step B181).

  When the allocation instruction pattern is not executed (step B181; No), the advance notice at the occurrence of the hold (preliminary notification) is set (step B146), the advance notice flag at the occurrence of the hold is set (step B100), and the hold number command The reception process ends. Further, when executing the hitting instruction pattern (step B181; Yes), a hitting pattern is set based on the table (the hitting pattern selection table) as a notice when the hold occurs (step B182), and a notice notice execution flag when the hold occurs Is set (step B100), and the pending number command reception process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 shows a display example on the display device 41 when the sorting instruction pattern is executed. In this display, the start memory display area 41a is set at the center of the display area, and the upper area of the start memory display area 41a displays the first special map variable display game corresponding to the first special map variable display game. It is set as a display area 41e. In addition, the lower area of the start memory display area 41a is a second display area 41f for displaying a decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation display game. The start memory display 41b corresponding to the first start memory is displayed with an upward arrow pointing to the first display area, and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory is displayed with a downward arrow pointing to the second display area. Is done.

  In this example, the second start memory is generated during the execution of the first special figure variation display game in the state where there is no special figure start memory, and the divided instruction pattern is executed as a prior notification based on the occurrence of the second start memory. Is selected, and the pattern 1 is selected as the allocation mode. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory and the prior notification display 41c corresponding to the placement instruction pattern are displayed. At this point, it is suggested that the special figure fluctuation display game based on the last special figure start memory for which the assignment is specified will have a specific fluctuation pattern, a specific display mode, and a specific result. Will be.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the special figure start memory as instructed by the placement instruction pattern is generated, the prior notification display 41c corresponding to the special figure start memory becomes the start memory display 41b. At this time, in order to indicate that the special figure start memory is a special figure start memory as instructed, the display is different from the start memory display 41b corresponding to the special figure start memory not instructed in advance. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the special figure start memory is generated in accordance with the instruction, notification that the instruction has been achieved is made and based on the special figure start memory to be switched in the variation pattern selection table. Information about the special figure variation display game is notified. Here, the display color of the start memory display 41b notifies the high possibility that the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory will be a big hit.

  From the above, the start winning area includes the first start winning area (start winning port 36) and the second start winning area (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the start winning storage means (game control device 100) The first start winning area is stored as a first start memory, and the second start winning area is stored as a second start memory. The prior notification means (production control device 300) is still For the predetermined start memory that has not occurred, it is designated whether to generate the first start memory or the second start memory, and when the start memory is generated according to the specification, it is executed based on the predetermined start memory. The information regarding the variable display game is notified.

  In addition, the prior notification means (production control device 300) is configured to store the first start memory and the predetermined start memory before the occurrence of the preceding start memory that occurs before the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred. Designate which of the second start memories is to be generated, and when the predetermined start memories and the preceding start memories are generated as specified, information on the variable display game executed based on the predetermined start memories is notified It will be like that.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the start winning opening 36 for generating the first start memory and the normal variation winning device 37 for generating the second start memory in the game area 32 is an arrangement in which it is possible to select which one to win according to the player's intention. Also good. For example, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down on the left side of the center case 40 (so-called left-handed), it is possible to win the start winning opening 36 that generates the first start memory, and the game ball is placed on the right side of the center case 40. When it is fired so as to flow down (so-called right-handed), it is made possible to win in the normal variation winning device 37 that generates the second start memory. In addition, when executing the hitting instruction pattern, if the second start memory is generated in a state that can be equivalent to the first start memory (for example, a short time state), the special start memory is generated according to the hitting instruction pattern. It is even better because the possibility of being able to be increased.

  Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third modified example of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to execute the second special figure fluctuation display game with priority over the first special figure fluctuation display game.

[Special figure routine processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure routine process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the special figure routine process shown in FIG. In this special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A461). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A462; Yes), it is checked whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A463).

  And if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step A464; Yes), it is checked whether or not the customer waiting demo has already started (step A303), and the customer waiting demo has not started. That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step A304; No), a process of setting the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo is performed (step A305). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A306), a command setting process (step A307) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A465) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. If it is determined in step A304 that the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A304; Yes), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A465) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A465), a process for setting the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) for defining the special prize fraud monitoring period, etc. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A462 that the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A462; No), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A312) is performed, and a special figure fluctuation in-process transition setting process (special figure 2) is performed. ) (Step A467) is performed, and the special figure routine processing is terminated. In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A467), the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, and the changing of the second special figure Test signal, information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52 (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52, a timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) Etc.) is set.

  If it is determined in step A464 that the number of special figure 1 hold is not 0 (step A464; No), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A311) is performed, and special figure fluctuation in-process transition setting processing (special figure 1) is performed. ) (Step A466) is performed, and the special figure routine processing is terminated. In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A466), the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, and the changing of the first special figure Test signal, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, a timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) Etc.) is set.

  As described above, the second start memory check in Step A461 and Step A462 is performed before the first start memory check in Step A463 and Step A464. The variation start process (step A312) in FIG. 2 is executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory, priority control means for executing the variable display game based on the second start memory in preference to the variable display game based on the first start memory. Eggplant.

[Hold count command reception processing]
Further, in place of the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 38, the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. In this hold number command reception process, after setting the special figure 2 hold number display data based on the updated content (step B92), the special figure 2 hold occurrence process is performed (step B191).

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the special figure 2 on-hold occurrence processing, first, it is determined whether or not on-hold occurrence notice is in progress (preliminary notice) (step B201), not on hold occurrence notice (not on advance notice). In the case (step B201; No), the special figure 2 suspension occurrence processing is terminated. In addition, when it is during advance notice at the time of occurrence of hold (preliminary notification) (step B201; Yes), the special effect information is confirmed (step B202), and the generated special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is selected as a variation pattern. It is confirmed whether to execute the special figure variation display game to be switched (step B203).

  If it corresponds to the switching target (step B204; Yes), the generated special figure 2 hold display is set to the detailed notice display (step B205), and the special figure 2 hold occurrence processing is terminated. In addition, when it does not correspond to the switching target (step B204; No), the pending notice at the time of the occurrence of the holding is reset in response to the occurrence of the holding in the special figure 2 (step B206), and the special figure 2 holding occurrence process is executed. finish.

  FIG. 49 shows an example of a display when the special-figure display game based on the second start memory that occurred during the execution of the prior notification does not fall under the switching target of the fluctuation pattern selection table (step B204; No). . The start memory display area 41a is a first start memory display area 41g for displaying a start memory display 41b corresponding to the first start memory on the left side, and a start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the right side. The second start memory display area 41h. Further, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first start memory and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory are different display modes, and which special figure start memory is selected depending on the display mode. Discrimination is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the state where there are three first start memories, prior notification is given to the fourth first start memory that has not yet occurred. In this state, the special figure variation display game based on the fourth first start memory to be notified in advance is scheduled to be switched in the variation pattern selection table.

  In this state, when one second start memory is generated as shown in FIG. 49B, the second special figure variation display game based on the second start memory has priority over the first special figure variation display game. Therefore, the special figure starting memory for executing the special figure fluctuation display game to be switched in the fluctuation pattern selection table is shifted to the third first starting memory. For this reason, a process (step B206) for resetting the on-holding notice that is being executed in response to the on-hold occurrence shown in FIG. As a result of this processing, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the advance notification display 41c corresponding to the fourth first start memory moves to the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third first start memory, As shown in FIG. 49 (d), the detailed notice display (here, “reach” display) is performed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third first start memory.

  Also, FIG. 50 shows an example of a display when the special-figure display game based on the second start memory generated during the execution of the prior notification corresponds to the switching target of the fluctuation pattern selection table (step B204; Yes). Indicated. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), in the state where there is one first start memory, a prior notification is given to the second first start memory that has not yet occurred. In this state, the special figure variation display game based on the second first start memory to be notified in advance is scheduled to be switched in the variation pattern selection table. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and there is no start memory.

  When the second start memory is generated from this state, the second start memory becomes the special figure start display memory for executing the special figure variation display game to be switched in the variation pattern selection table. Processing for setting the display to the detailed notice display (step B205) is performed. By this processing, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the advance notification display 41c corresponding to the first start memory is moved to the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory, and as shown in FIG. 50 (d). Then, a detailed notice display (here, “reach” display) is performed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (e), the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second start memory is moved to the area where the prior notification display 41c of the first start memory display area 41g is displayed, and FIG. ), A detailed notice display (here, “reach” display) may be performed. The display mode of the start memory display 41b remains the display mode corresponding to the second start memory.

  By such processing, it is possible to prevent contradiction in the prior notification when the second start memory that is digested in preference to the first start memory occurs. From the above, the start winning area includes the first start winning area (start winning port 36) and the second start winning area (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the start winning storage means (game control device 100) The first start winning area is stored as a first start memory, and the second start winning area is stored as a second start memory. If there is a second start memory, (2) It includes priority control means (game control device 100) for preferentially executing the variable display game based on the start memory over the variable display game based on the first start memory, and the prior notification means (effect control device 300) 2 When the start memory corresponding to the prior notification changes due to the occurrence of the start memory, the target of the prior notification is changed. In addition, when the start memory corresponding to the prior notification is changed to the start memory that has already been generated due to the occurrence of the second start memory, the prior notification means provides information on the variable display game that is executed based on the start memory. It will be reported.

  Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment notifies the establishment of the predetermined condition by combining or separating the plurality of start storage displays 41b displayed in the start storage display area 41a based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Yes.

  FIG. 51 shows an example of display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), in this display, the upper part of the display area is a variable display area for displaying a decoration special figure variable display game, and the lower part of the display area is a start memory display area 41a. The state shown in FIG. 51A shows a state in which the decorative special figure variation display game is in a variation display and there are eight start memories. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when a new start memory is generated in the start memory display area 41a, the corresponding start memory display 41b jumps from the right toward the start memory display 41b. Are displayed so as to be aligned at a position adjacent to the start-up storage display 41b at the right end displayed in alignment.

  In addition, when a specific start memory (specific hold) is generated as a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of start memory displays displayed in the start memory display area 41a to notify that a specific start memory has occurred. The specific hold display which unites and displays 41b is performed. Here, the specific start memory is, for example, a start memory that becomes a special result or a start memory that becomes a specific reach state.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (c), when the start memory is generated, the corresponding start memory display 41b is displayed so as to jump into the start memory display 41b aligned from the right side. When this start memory is a specific start memory, when the corresponding start memory display 41b reaches a position adjacent to the right end start memory display 41b displayed in alignment, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), A plurality of start memory displays 41b are combined to be a specific hold display. The combined start memory display 41b has a shape in which adjacent start memory displays 41b are connected by a connecting portion 41i.

  The combined start memory display 41b corresponds to the start memory for performing a continuous effect on a specific start memory, and here, from the special figure variation display game based on the start memory three times before the specific start memory. It has been informed that continuous effects are performed over a special figure variation display game based on a specific start-up memory. Then, when the special figure variation display game is started based on the start memory corresponding to the start memory display 41b displayed in the specific hold display, as shown in FIG. The start memory display 41b to be displayed is displayed so as to be separated from the connecting portion 41i.

  With such a display, it is possible to perform a novel start memory display that has not been achieved in the past, and to increase the player's expectation for the start memory corresponding to the start memory display that is the target of coalescing or separation. Can be improved.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs the process shown in FIG. 52 in the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding hold storage area (step B212), and it is checked whether the specific hold display is being executed (step B213).

  If the specific hold display is being executed (step B213; Yes), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If the specific hold display is not being executed (step B213; No), prefetch information relating to the hold is acquired (step B214), and it is determined whether the hold is specific (step B215). The specific hold is, for example, start-up memory with a special result or start-up memory with a specific reach state. If it is not this specific suspension (step B215; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If it is specific hold (step B215; Yes), hold coalescence display information is set (step B216), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated. The hold coalescence display information includes information on which start memory display 41b is to be merged, and the display mode of the start memory display 41b is set according to this information.

[Pending display processing]
The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 performs a hold display process shown in FIG. 53 as a display control process in the start memory display area 41a. In this hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number (step B221). And when there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), a hold display process is complete | finished. Further, when there is the hold number display data (step B222; Yes), it is checked whether there is hold coalescence display information set when executing the specific hold display (step B223).

  If there is no hold coalescence display information (step B224; No), a normal hold display setting process is performed (step B226), and the hold display process is terminated. In the normal hold display setting process (step B226), the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases. Moreover, when there exists pending | holding union display information (step B224; Yes), a specific pending | holding display setting process is performed (step B225), and a pending | holding display process is complete | finished. In the specific hold display setting process (step B225), as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (d), settings for displaying the specific hold display are performed.

  As a result of the processing described above, as shown in FIG. 51, a plurality of start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a are merged based on the occurrence of a specific start memory (establishment of a predetermined condition). The occurrence of the specific start memory can be notified.

  The establishment of the predetermined condition is defined as the occurrence of a specific start memory, but other conditions may be used. For example, when the start memory number becomes a predetermined number or more, or when the start memory number has reached the upper limit number, the occurrence of a so-called overflow prize in which a game ball winning in the start winning area is further detected is set as a predetermined condition. A plurality of conditions may be combined. In this case, the determination is made in consideration of these conditions in the determination (step B215) as to whether or not it is the specific hold in the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG.

  Further, when the specific hold display is being executed (step B213; Yes), the start memory display 41b corresponding to the generated start memory is not combined, but may be performed. In this case, for example, the start memory generated this time is the specific start memory, and the result of the special figure variation display game based on the specific start memory that triggered the generation of the specific hold display being executed is out of date. In some cases, the start memory display 41b up to the specific start memory generated this time may be combined with the start memory display 41b already combined.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, a special variation pattern display game that is a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as a specific variation pattern, and start memory for executing the special diagram variation display game has not yet occurred. In a state where there is no information, a prior notification indicating information related to the start-up memory is performed. The gaming machine of this embodiment also has this configuration, but it is also possible to omit this prior notification configuration and use the configuration of this embodiment alone.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode in the start memory display area 41a.

  FIG. 54 shows an example of display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the gaming machine of this modification, the start memory display 41b is always in a combined state. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), at the start of the special figure variation display game, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be digested is displayed so as to be separated from the connecting portion 41i.

  Further, for example, when there is a specific start memory such as a start memory with a special result or a start memory with a specific reach state, the display mode of the start memory display 41b is set as a specific pending suggestion display to another start memory. By making it different from the display 41b, the existence of the specific start-up memory is suggested. In addition, the specific hold suggestion display is changed to the specific hold display to clearly notify the presence of the specific start-up memory. FIG. 55 shows an example of a display mode for notifying the presence of a specific startup memory.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the display mode change timing in the example shown in FIG. 55 is directed to the start memory display 41b in which the start memory is generated and the corresponding start memory display 41b is aligned from the right side. It is said that it was time to jump in and merge. As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when there is a specific start memory in the start memory that has already occurred, the display mode of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is set as a specific pending suggestion display. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), even when the start memory generated this time is a specific start memory, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is set as a specific pending suggestion display.

  When a new start-up memory is generated while the specific hold suggestion display is being performed, the specific hold suggestion display is changed to the specific hold display. As shown in FIG. 55 (d), when the specific start memory that has already performed the specific hold suggestion display is the start memory that becomes the pseudo-continuous variation mode, the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory Change the mode to specific hold display. The pseudo continuous variation mode is a method for deriving a result mode by performing unit variation display that is stopped after a plurality of identification information is varied and displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the special figure variation display game. It can also be said that the re-variable display for starting the variable display again is performed once or more after a temporary stop in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decorative special map variable display game in the middle of the special map variable display game. When there is a start memory that becomes the pseudo-continuous variation mode, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is separated from the other start memory displays 41b, and the separated start memory display 41b indicates the number of unit variation displays. Change to the specific hold display modified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), when the specific start memory that has already performed the specific hold suggestion display is the start memory that gives a special result, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory is displayed in the other memory. It is separated from the start storage display 41b and changed to a specific hold display that displays “NO” indicating that a special result is obtained.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 56 instead of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it is received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding hold storage area (step B212), the prefetch information related to the hold is acquired (step B214), and there is a specific hold. Is determined (step B215).

  The specific hold here is, for example, a start memory with a special result or a start memory with a specific reach state, and there may be a specific hold not only in the start memory generated this time but also in the already stored start memory. Judgment. If there is no specific hold (step B215; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If there is a specific hold (step B215; Yes), it is determined whether the specific hold suggesting display is being executed (step B231). When the specific hold suggesting display is not being executed (step B231; No), the specific hold display information is set (step B232), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. If the specific hold suggesting display is being executed (step B231; Yes), hold display change information is set (step B233), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. The specific hold display information and the hold display change information include information about which start storage display 41b is in what display form, and the display form of the start storage display 41b is set according to this information.

[Pending display processing]
Further, in place of the hold display process shown in FIG. 53, the hold display process shown in FIG. 57 is performed. In the hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number (step B221). And when there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), a hold display process is complete | finished. In addition, when there is the hold number display data (step B222; Yes), it is checked whether or not there is specific hold display information set when executing the specific hold display (step B241).

  If there is specific hold display information (step B242; Yes), a specific hold display setting process is performed (step B247), and the hold display process is terminated. In the specific hold display setting process (step B247), settings for displaying the specific hold display as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and (c) are performed. If there is no specific hold display information (step B242; No), it is checked whether there is hold display change information that is set when a specific start-up memory is generated when the specific hold display has already been performed. (Step B243).

  If there is hold display change information (step B244; Yes), hold display change setting processing is performed (step B245), and the hold display processing is terminated. In the hold display change setting process (step B245), for example, a specific hold display as shown in FIG. 55 (b) is changed to a display mode as shown in FIGS. 55 (d) and (e). If there is no hold display change information (step B244; No), a normal hold display setting process is performed (step B246), and the hold display process is terminated. In the normal hold display setting process (step B246), the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases.

  As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 55, the display mode of the plurality of start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a is changed based on the occurrence of a specific start memory (establishment of a predetermined condition). (Shape change or separation) is performed, and the occurrence of a specific start-up memory can be notified.

  Note that the specific hold indication as shown in 55 (d) and (e) may be performed without the specific hold suggestion display as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c). In addition, the start condition of the specific hold suggestion display or the change condition of the specific hold display is set as the occurrence of the start memory, but it is not limited to this. For example, the start memory number becomes a predetermined number or more, or the so-called overflow prize Occurrence may be a predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be combined. Further, the specific hold suggestion display and the specific hold display as shown in FIG. 55 may be performed when the start memory display 41b is combined in the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first modified example of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the specific hold suggestion display.

  In the specific hold suggestion display of this modification, the change condition to the specific hold display is the occurrence of a predetermined number of start-up memories. After performing the specific hold suggestion display as shown in FIG. 58 (a), as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the generation condition display 41j indicating the start memory number that needs to be generated as the change condition to the specific hold display Is made. This generation condition display 41j is displayed in the area where the start memory display 41b of the start memory that has not yet occurred among the start memories that need to be generated for the change to the specific hold display. FIG. 58 (b) informs that it is necessary to generate the remaining three startup memories.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), when the start memory that satisfies the condition for changing to the specific hold display occurs, the specific hold suggestion display is changed to the specific hold display. In this example, the specific hold display is used to notify that a special result is obtained.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In order to perform the control as described above, the production control apparatus 300 performs a hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 59 instead of the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. In this hold number command reception process, after the process related to the increase / decrease of the start memory (steps B81 to B92), it is determined whether the specific hold suggestion display is being executed (step B251). In addition, although it is made not to perform about the process (step B93 to 100 of FIG. 28) regarding the prior notification which is the structure of 1st Embodiment, after performing the process regarding this prior notification, the specific pending | holding suggestion display is being performed. It may be determined whether or not (step B251).

  When the specific hold suggestion display is not being executed (step B251; No), the hold number command receiving process is terminated. Further, when the specific hold indication is being executed (step B251; Yes), the hold number information is acquired (step B252), and it is determined whether a predetermined number that is a condition for changing to the specific hold display has been reached (step B252). Step B253).

  If the predetermined number has not been reached (step B253; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. When the predetermined number is reached (step B253; Yes), the hold display change information is set (step B254), and the hold number command receiving process is terminated. The hold display change information includes information indicating which start storage display 41b is in what display form, and the display form of the start storage display 41b is set according to this information.

  Even when an overflow command is received (step B83; Yes), the hold display change information is set (step B254), and the hold number command receiving process is terminated. Further, in the hold display process shown in FIG. 57, when there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), it is determined whether there is hold display change information. The change setting process (step B245) is performed. In this way, it is possible to change to the specific hold display even if an overflow prize is generated.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), a variable display device (special display) that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. In the gaming machine having the display 51, the special display 2 52, and the display device 41) and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result A start winning storage means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as an execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area, and a variable display device Effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling display of the display, and the effect control means is recorded in the variable display control means (effect control apparatus 300) for performing display control of the variable display game, and in the start winning memory means. Start memory display control means (production control device 300) that performs display control of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory that is being performed, and the start memory display control means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The combination of the plurality of start memory displays displayed as the display 41b can be executed.

  Here, merging means that two or more start memory displays are combined into one, and the starter displays are merged so that the number of independent start memory displays 41b decreases, or adjacent start memory displays. 41b couple | bonds by the connection part 41i. Furthermore, it includes that the other start memory display 41b unites with the united start memory display 41b, and the united start memory display 41b unites.

  In addition, prior result determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. The start memory display control means (production control device 300) can execute the start memory display combination corresponding to the determination result based on the determination result of the prior result determination means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. There will be.

  Further, the predetermined condition is that the start memory stored in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) is a predetermined number.

  The predetermined condition is that the start memory stored in the start winning memory means (game control device 100) reaches the upper limit, and further the game to the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) is made. This means that a ball winning is detected (overflow winning).

  Further, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) can set the display mode of the start memory display 41b based on the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100).

  The start memory display control means (production control device 300) can execute a separation of a plurality of start memory displays to be displayed as the start memory display 41b based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Further, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) can execute separation of the start memory display corresponding to the determination result based on the determination result of the prior result determination means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. . Separation includes a state in which a part or all of the combined start memory display 41b is separated from the combined state, or a state in which the start memory display 41b corresponding to one start memory is divided into a plurality of start memory displays 41b.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the second embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the start memory display 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the gaming machine of this modification, the start memory display 41b is displayed by characters that can appear in the reach state. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), there are three types of characters A to C that can appear in the reach state, and the start memory display 41b displays characters A, B, and C in a repeating order. . Also, as shown in FIG. 61, the character that appears for each type of reach state is determined. For example, characters A and B appear in the character series of SP Reach 2. In SP reach 3, all characters A, B, and C appear.

  FIG. 62 shows an example of display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the state where there are two start memories, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the previously stored start memory a is the character A, and the start corresponding to the start memory b stored later. The memory display 41b is the character B.

  Here, as a result of the pre-reading process, when the special figure variation display game based on the start memory b stored later becomes the reach state of the SP reach 2 character A system, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the start memory b Since the start memory display 41b corresponding to the character B is the character B, the pre-reading effect that is displayed in combination with the start memory display 41b stored previously by the character A is performed. In this way, it is notified that the characters A and B are combined and displayed, so that there is a high possibility that the characters A and B appear in the SP reach 2 character A system. If a new start memory is generated thereafter, the corresponding start memory display 41b becomes the character C, but the start memory display 41b is not merged.

  Further, as a result of the pre-reading process, when the reach state common to the SP reach 3 is set in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory b stored later, first, the start memory display 41b is combined as shown in FIG. A pre-reading effect is performed. As described above, at this point in time, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of becoming the SP reach 2 character A system. Thereafter, when a new start memory c is generated, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the corresponding start memory display 41b becomes the character C, but the pre-reading effect is changed so that the start memory display 41b is also combined. . In this way, the characters A, B, and C are combined and displayed, so that it is notified that there is a high possibility that the characters A, B, and C will appear as SP reach 3. If there are three or more start memories from the beginning, that is, if there is a start memory before the start memory a, the three start memories from the start memory to the start memory b are combined at the start of the pre-reading effect. Anyway.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 56 instead of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it is received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B212), and it is determined whether the prefetch effect is being executed (step B261).

  When the pre-reading effect is being executed (step B261; Yes), it is checked whether there is an additional coalescence display enabled flag (step B262). If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step B261; No), the pre-reading information related to the hold is acquired (step B214), and it is determined whether the hold is specific (step B215).

  The case of specific hold means that the start memory is SP reach 2 or 3, and the start memory display 41b displayed corresponding to the start memory is a character that appears in the reach state. If it is this specific hold (step B215; Yes), the combined hold display information is set (step B264), the additional combined display enable flag is set based on the prefetch information (step B265), and the prefetch command receiving process is performed. finish. The combined hold display information includes information about which start storage display 41b is in what display form, and the display form of the start storage display 41b is set according to this information. Further, the additional combined display enable flag is set when it is necessary to change the pre-reading effect as in the case of FIGS. 62B to 62C. Here, it is set in the case of SP reach 3 and there are only two start memories.

  On the other hand, if it is not specific hold (step B215; No), it is checked whether there is an additional coalescence displayable flag (step B262). If there is no additional coalescence displayable flag (step B263; No), prefetch command reception processing Exit. If there is an additional combined display enable flag (step B263; Yes), combined hold additional display information is set (step B264), and the prefetch command reception process ends. The combined hold additional display information includes information indicating which start memory display 41b is in what display mode, and the display mode of the start memory display 41b is set according to this information.

[Pending display processing]
Further, in place of the hold display process shown in FIG. 53, the hold display process shown in FIG. 64 is performed. In the hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number (step B221). And when there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), a hold display process is complete | finished. In addition, when there is the hold number display data (step B222; Yes), it is checked whether there is merge hold display information set when the prefetch effect is executed (step B271).

  If there is merge hold display information (step B272; Yes), merge hold display setting processing is performed (step B276), and the hold display processing is terminated. In the combined hold display setting process (step B276), a process of displaying a prefetch effect as shown in FIG. If there is no combined hold display information (step B272; No), it is checked whether there is combined hold additional display information set when changing the prefetch effect (step B273).

  When there is the combined hold addition display information (step B274; Yes), the combined hold additional display setting process is performed (step B275), and the hold display process is terminated. In the combined hold addition display setting process (step B275), for example, a pre-reading effect as shown in FIG. 62 (b) is changed to a display mode as shown in FIG. 62 (c). If there is no combined hold additional display information (step B274; No), a normal hold display setting process is performed (step B226), and the hold display process is terminated. In the normal hold display setting process (step B226), the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases.

  With the above processing, as shown in FIG. 62, the display mode of the plurality of start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a is changed based on the occurrence of a specific start memory (establishment of a predetermined condition). (Merging) is performed, and it becomes possible to notify the occurrence of the specific start-up memory. In addition to the occurrence of the reach state by combining the start-up memory display 41b displayed by the character appearing in the reach state, the reach type can be notified in advance, and a pre-reading effect with an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  The character displayed as the start memory display 41b is displayed in the order of A, B, and C. However, it is convenient to inform the type of reach state by combining the characters with reference to the pre-read result of the start memory. A character may be displayed.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) selects and displays any one of a plurality of types of characters that can appear in the reach state as the start memory display 41b, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory determined to be in the reach state by the advance result determination means (game control device 100) is a character that appears in the reach state and is displayed adjacently. When the start memory display 41b displayed by the character appearing in the reach state is included in the start memory display 41b, the start memory display 41b displayed adjacently is combined.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the second modified example of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution aspect of the prefetch effect.

  The pre-reading effect of this modification is changed to a more detailed pre-reading effect when a predetermined number of start-up memories are generated. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), first, a prefetch target display 41k is displayed as a specific hold suggestion display indicating that the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c is a target of the prefetch effect, and further detailed prefetching is performed. A generation condition display 41j indicating the number of start memories that need to be generated is displayed as a change condition to the effect. The generation condition display 41j is a start storage display 41b corresponding to a start storage that has not yet occurred among start memories that need to be generated for changing to the specific hold display. It is displayed in a part different from the part, and in FIG. 65 (a), it is informed that the remaining four start memories need to be generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 65B and 65C, when the start memory notified by the generation condition display 41j occurs, the corresponding generation condition display 41j becomes the start storage display 41b. And as shown in FIG.65 (d), when the start memory | storage which satisfy | fills the change conditions of the prefetch effect which makes a specific hold suggestion display generate | occur | produces, a prefetch effect will be changed. In this example, a pre-reading effect for notifying the occurrence of SP reach 3 in which characters A, B, and C appear in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory c is set.

  Note that in the gaming machine of this modification, which start storage display 41b is set in what display mode in the hold display change information set by the hold number command shown in FIG. 59 (with which start storage display 41b is combined). And the display mode of the start memory display 41b is set according to this information.

  It is desirable that the pre-reading effect as in this modification is performed in a state in which the normally variable winning device 37 has a long open time and the second start memory is likely to occur. The case where the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 is long includes not only the time-short state but also the case where the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 is increased with a predetermined probability even when the time is not the time-shorting state. Moreover, you may provide also the structure of the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first modified example of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted. Then, mainly different parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the start memory display 41b is connected in a ring shape.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the start memory display 41b of the present modification is connected via a connecting portion 41i and has an annular shape. Furthermore, the start memory display 41b coupled in a ring shape is moved along the ring while maintaining the coupled state (moving counterclockwise here). Further, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the newly generated start memory is displayed so as to jump from the right toward the start memory display 41b connected in a ring shape, and is taken into the ring as shown in FIG. 66 (b). . Also, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), a start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be digested is displayed so as to jump out of the ring at the start of the special figure variation display game, and as shown in FIG. 66 (d). A special figure variation display game is started.

  In addition, the display form of the start memory display 41b connected in a ring shape can suggest a pre-read result of the corresponding start memory. As shown in FIG. 67, the length of the connecting portion 41i suggests the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. As the variation time of the special figure variation display game is longer, a reach state that is more likely to have a special result is executed, and the length of the connecting portion 41i suggests a higher possibility of a special result. I can say that. As shown in FIG. 68, the jackpot reliability, which is highly likely to be a special result, is also notified by the color of the start memory display 41b.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 69 instead of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B212), and the prefetch information related to the hold is acquired (step B214). Thereafter, by setting a hold display mode based on the prefetch information (step B281), any one of the display modes in FIG. 68 is set, and length information of the connecting portion is set based on the prefetch information (step B282). 67, one of the display modes in FIG. 67 is set.

[Pending display processing]
Further, in place of the hold display process shown in FIG. 57, the hold display process shown in FIG. 70 is performed. In the hold display process, first, in the hold display process, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease in the starting memory number (step B221). And when there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), a hold display process is complete | finished. Further, when there is the hold number display data (step B222; Yes), the hold display mode is set (step B291), and the display setting is performed based on the length information of the connecting portion (step B292). The hold display mode and the length information of the connecting portion are set in the above-described prefetch command setting process, and display setting is performed based on this information. Thereafter, a hold display setting process (step B293) is performed, and the hold display process ends. In the hold display setting process (step B293), the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases as shown in FIG.

  By using the start memory display 41b as described above, an unprecedented start memory display can be performed. Moreover, by making it cyclic | annular, the digestion order of starting memory can be made difficult to understand, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Moreover, since the display mode of the connection part 41i of the start memory display 41b can be set based on the determination result of the prior result determination means, a novel pre-reading effect that is not possible in the past can be performed.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) is configured to combine the plurality of start memory displays 41b in an annular shape.

  In addition, prior result determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. The start memory display control means (production control device 300) combines the adjacent start memory displays 41b via the connecting portion 41i, and the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100) Therefore, the display mode of the connecting portion 41i can be set.

  Note that various display modes are conceivable as the display mode of the start memory display 41b. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), there is a high possibility of being a big hit depending on the thickness of the connecting portion 41i (reliability). May be suggested. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), it is possible to suggest a high possibility (reliability) that a big hit can be obtained by changing the shape of the start memory display 41b. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), a plurality of rings may be formed. In this case, a group is determined based on information such as the presence / absence and type of reach and the likelihood of being a big hit, and a ring is formed for each group.

  When the display mode is as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the prefetch command receiving process shown in FIG. 72 is performed instead of the prefetch command receiving process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, a process of setting hold group information based on the prefetch information (step B301) is performed. Further, in place of the hold display process shown in FIG. 70, the hold display process shown in FIG. 73 is performed. In this hold display process, a process for setting group display based on hold group information (step B311) is performed.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) combines the plurality of start memory displays 41b in a ring shape for each group set based on the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100). It will be like that.

  Note that the configurations of the second embodiment and the modified examples of the second embodiment can be applied in appropriate combination. Furthermore, the configurations of the first embodiment and the modifications of the first embodiment can be applied in appropriate combinations. In this case, if there is a conflicting process, the process may be distributed depending on conditions or arbitrarily.

  Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display order of the start memory display 41b can be changed.

  FIG. 74 shows a display example on the display device 41. Basically, the start memory display 41b is displayed so as to be arranged in order from the left side in accordance with the digest order of the corresponding start memory. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), when a start memory exceeding a predetermined number (here, four) is generated, a condition for changing the display order of the start memory display 41b is established in the next special figure variation display game. .

  As shown in FIG. 74 (c), in the next special figure variation display game, shuffle display for changing the display order of the start memory display 41b is performed. At this time, if there is a newly generated start memory, the corresponding start memory display 41b is not added to the change of the display order. Note that the display order may be changed including the start memory display 41b corresponding to the newly generated start memory. In addition, the occurrence of this new start memory establishes a condition for changing the display order of the start memory display in the next special figure variation display game.

  After the start memory display 41b is shuffled for a predetermined time, it is arranged in a line with the display order changed, and the special figure variation display game is ended as shown in FIG. 74 (d). At this time, in the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory in which the pre-read result is a specific result (a special result, a specific reach state, a randomly selected one, etc.) Done. Here, “!” Is displayed as a hold prefetching suggestion display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the next special figure variation display game is started. The start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory digested at the start is the start memory display 41b displayed at the right end in FIG. 74 (d). Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), even in this special figure variation display game, shuffle display for changing the display order of the start memory display 41b is performed, and the display order is changed and arranged in a line. As shown in (g), the special figure variation display game ends. At this time, the start-up storage display 41b in which the hold prefetch suggestion display has already been performed is changed to a hold prefetch suggestion display that more clearly informs the prefetch result. Here, the hold prefetch suggestion display is changed to “!?”. In addition, when the display order is changed for the first time, a hold prefetch suggestion display may be performed for a start memory for which the hold prefetch suggestion display has not been performed. Here, “!!!!” is displayed as the hold prefetch suggestion display. Has been made.

  By changing the display order in this way, it is possible to perform an unprecedented start memory display, and the player starts a variable display game with which start memory until the actual variable display game is started. It is difficult to grasp what is being done, and the expectation can be continued. In particular, in the case where the start-up memory display 41b displays the hold prefetch suggestion display, since it is not known when the start-up memory is consumed, the expectation can be continued and the interest can be improved.

[Fluctuation processing]
In order to perform the control as described above, the effect control device 300 performs the changing process shown in FIG. 75 instead of the changing process shown in FIG. 30. In this variation processing, if there is an effect request flag (step B121; Yes), whether there is a pending variation executable flag that is set when the condition for changing the display order of the startup storage display 41b is satisfied. Check (step B321). Then, when there is a hold fluctuation executable flag (step B322; Yes), the hold fluctuation execution flag is set (step B323), and the hold fluctuation execution flag is cleared (step B324). As a result, when the condition for changing the display order of the start memory display 41b is established at the start of the special figure variation display game, a process related to the pending fluctuation (shuffle display) is performed in the pending number command reception process described later. become.

[Hold count command reception processing]
Also, instead of the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 28, the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 76 is performed. In the hold number command reception process, after the process related to increase / decrease of the start memory (steps B81 to B92), it is checked whether the hold number has reached a predetermined number (for example, reached 4 or more) (step B331). In addition, although it is made not to perform about the process (step B93 to 100 of FIG. 28) regarding prior notification here, after performing the process regarding this prior notification, it checks whether the number of pending | holdings has reached the predetermined number ( Step B331) may be used.

  In the check (step B331) whether the number of holdings has reached a predetermined number, it is assumed that the number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 or more) due to an increase in the starting memory number, and the starting memory number is subtracted. As a result, the predetermined number is not included in the arrival. And when the number of pending | holding has not reached the predetermined number (step B332; No), a pending | holding number command reception process is complete | finished. Further, when the number of holdings reaches the predetermined number (step B332; Yes), a holding variable execution flag is set (step B333), and it is checked whether there is a holding variable execution flag (step B334). The hold variation execution flag is a flag that is set when a change in the display order of the start memory display 41b is started. It should be noted that whether or not there is a pending fluctuation execution flag is also checked (step B334) when no pending number command has been received (step B82; No) or when an overflow command has been received (step B83; Yes).

  If there is no pending fluctuation execution flag (step B335; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If there is a hold fluctuation execution flag (step B335; Yes), it is determined whether it is the start of hold fluctuation (step B336). When it is the start time of the hold fluctuation (step B336; Yes), the hold fluctuation pattern is set (step B337), the hold fluctuation time is set (step B338), and the hold count command receiving process is terminated. . If it is not at the start of the hold fluctuation (step B336; No), it is determined whether the value of the update timer is 0 (step B339). In this case, the update timer measures the execution time of the hold variation, and a value of 0 for this update timer indicates that the hold variation has ended. If the value of this update timer is not 0 (step B339; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If the value of the update timer is 0 (step B339; Yes), a hold fluctuation end setting process is performed (step B340), and the hold count command receiving process is ended. By this process, the start of the hold fluctuation as shown in FIG. 74 is determined, and the change pattern of the hold fluctuation and the change time are set.

[Pending change end setting processing]
As shown in FIG. 77, in the hold variation end setting process in the hold number command reception process described above, first, prefetch information in the hold storage area is acquired (step B351), and it is checked whether there is a big hit (step B352). When there is no big hit (step B352; No), a random number for execution of the hold prefetch suggestion display is extracted (step B354), and it is determined whether to execute the hold prefetch suggestion display based on the extracted random number (step B355).

  When the hold prefetch suggestion display is not executed (step B355; No), the hold variation execution completion flag is set (step B357), and the hold variation end setting process is ended. Further, when executing the hold prefetch suggestion display (step B355; Yes), the suggestion display information is set in the corresponding hold display (step B356), the hold variation execution completion flag is set (step B357), and the hold variation is performed. Terminate the end setting process.

  On the other hand, if there is a big hit (step B353; Yes), it is checked whether there is a pending variation execution flag (step B358), and if there is no pending variation execution flag (step B359; No), the corresponding pending display is performed. The following processing is performed (step B356) for setting suggestion display information to If there is a hold variation executed flag (step B359; Yes), the jackpot confirmation display information is set in the corresponding hold display (step B360), the hold variation executed flag is cleared (step B361), and the hold is held. The display end setting process ends. By this processing, the display of the hold prefetch suggestion display as shown in FIG. 74D or the change of the hold prefetch suggestion display as shown in FIG. 74G is performed.

[Pending display processing]
The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 performs a hold display process shown in FIG. 78 as a display control process in the start memory display area 41a. In this hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number (step B221). If there is the hold number display data (step B222; Yes), the normal hold display setting process is performed (step B226), and the hold display process is terminated. In the normal hold display setting process (step B226), the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases. If there is no hold number display data (step B222; No), it is checked whether or not there is suggestion display information set when the hold prefetch suggestion display is executed (step B371).

  When there is suggestion display information (step B372; Yes), a hold suggestion display setting process is performed (step B376), and the hold display process is terminated. Thereby, a reservation prefetch suggestion display as shown in FIG. 74 (d) is displayed. On the other hand, when there is no suggestion display information (step B372; No), it is checked whether there is jackpot confirmation display information that is set when the hold prefetch suggestion display has already been performed and there is a start memory that is a big hit ( Step B373). If there is no jackpot confirmation display information (step B374; No), the hold display process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is jackpot confirmation display information (step B374; Yes), a hold confirmation display setting process (step B375) is performed, and the hold display process is terminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (g), the start storage display 41b that has already been displayed with the prefetching suggestion is changed to a prefetching suggestion display that more clearly informs the prefetching result.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), a variable display device (special display) that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. In the gaming machine having the display 51, the special display 2 52, and the display device 41) and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result Start winning storage means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the winning area and sequentially storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as the execution right of the variable display game, and starting winning Game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing and controlling the variable display game based on the start memory in the order stored in the memory means as start memory, and an effect control hand for performing display control of the variable display device (The production control device 300), and the production control means corresponds to the change display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of the change display game, and the start memory stored in the start winning storage means. Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of the start memory display 41b, and the start memory display control means can change the display order of the start memory display 41b based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. There will be.

  Here, the display order of the start memory display 41b basically follows the start memory digestion order, and the display order is changed by changing the display order. Further, changing the display order includes changing the display order further and returning to a state in accordance with the original digest order. However, even if the display order is changed, the variable display game is started in the order actually stored in the start winning storage means.

  In addition, prior result determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. The start memory display control means (production control device 300) changes the display mode of the start memory display 41b to the display mode based on the determination result of the prior result determination means in accordance with the change in the display order of the start memory display 41b. It can be changed.

  Further, the predetermined condition is that a predetermined number of start memories are stored in the start winning memory means (game control device 100), and the start memory display control means (production control device 300) is started based on establishment of the predetermined condition. After changing the display order of the memory display 41b a predetermined number of times, the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100) can be clearly notified in the start memory display 41b.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the special figure variation display game that is the predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as the specific variation pattern, and the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game has not yet occurred. In a state where there is no information, a prior notification indicating information related to the start-up memory is performed. The gaming machine of this embodiment also has this configuration, but it is also possible to omit this prior notification configuration and use the configuration of this embodiment alone.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the third embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification is different in the control processing method, and controls the hold variation by an independent process.

[1st scene control processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. 79 is performed instead of the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this first scene control process, when a fluctuation pattern command is received, a process during fluctuation (step B71) and a hold fluctuation process (step B381) related to the hold fluctuation (shuffle display) are performed. Note that the gaming machine of this modification does not perform the processing of steps B321 to B324 regarding the hold fluctuation in the mid-fluctuation process shown in FIG. Moreover, the process (step B129) which clears an effect request flag is not performed. Further, the processing of steps B334 to B340 regarding the hold variation in the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 76 is not performed.

[Pending variation processing]
FIG. 80 shows the above-described hold variation process (step B381). In this hold variation process, first, it is determined whether there is an effect request flag (step B391). If there is an effect request flag (step B391; Yes), a condition for changing the display order of the start memory display 41b is established. It is checked whether or not there is a hold variation executable flag set in this case (step B392).

  If there is no hold fluctuation executable flag (step B393; No), the effect request flag is cleared (step B398), and the hold fluctuation process is terminated. If there is a hold variation executable flag (step B393; Yes), a hold variation pattern setting process is performed (step B394), and a scene sequence table corresponding to the set hold variation pattern is set (step B395). This scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display in the pending fluctuation. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the pending fluctuation is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table.

  Thereafter, the hold fluctuation time setting process (step B396) is performed, the hold fluctuation execution executable flag is cleared (step B397), the effect request flag is cleared (step B398), and the hold fluctuation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no production request flag (step B391; No), it is determined whether the value of the update timer is 0 (step B399). In this case, the update timer measures the execution time of the pending fluctuation scene managed according to the scene sequence table. A value of 0 for this update timer indicates that the scene being executed has ended. If the value of this update timer is not 0 (step B399; No), the hold variation process is terminated. If the value of this update timer is 0 (step B399; Yes), the next scene data is set (step B400), and it is determined whether it is the hold fluctuation end timing (step B401). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the update timer.

  If it is not the hold fluctuation end timing (step B401; No), the hold fluctuation processing is ended. If it is the hold fluctuation end timing (step B401; Yes), hold change end setting processing is performed (step B402), and the hold fluctuation processing is ended.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the third embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification is different in the control processing method, and the control of the hold fluctuation is performed integrally with the control of the special figure fluctuation display game. Note that the gaming machine of this modification does not perform the processing from steps B334 to B340 regarding the hold variation in the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG.

[Fluctuation processing]
In the gaming machine according to the present modification, the changing process shown in FIG. 81 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In this process during fluctuation, after the movable body request set (step B123), it is checked whether there is a pending fluctuation executable flag (step B321), and if there is a pending fluctuation executable flag (step B322; Yes), the pending The variation execution variation pattern table is selected (step B411), and the pending variation execution enable flag is cleared (step B324). This on-hold variation execution variation pattern table is a variation pattern table for setting a variation pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game including the on-hold variation.

  As a result, in the subsequent variation pattern information setting process, the decoration special figure variation display game variation pattern is set with reference to the pending variation execution variation pattern table. As a result, it is possible to control the hold variation and the decoration special view variation display game with one scene data.

  Further, after setting the next scene data (step B132), it is determined whether it is the hold fluctuation end timing (step B412). If it is not the hold fluctuation end timing (step B412; No), the hold fluctuation processing is ended. If it is the hold fluctuation end timing (step B412; Yes), hold change end setting processing is performed (step B413), and the changing process is ended.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the third embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the hold variation (shuffle display).

  With respect to the hold variation in this modification, the start condition is established when the start memory number becomes a predetermined number, and the hold variation is performed in the next special figure change display game. The start timing of the hold variation can be set to various timings such as the start of the decoration special view variation display game, immediately before the variation display of the identification information ends, or during the stop time.

  As shown in FIG. 82, this on-hold variation is a game in which the start memory display 41b races, and the start memory display 41b that has reached the earliest corresponds to the start memory to be digested next. Yes. In this hold variation, first, as shown in FIG. 82A, the start memory display 41b is aligned with the course on which the race is performed. At this time, the start memory display 41b is arranged from the top according to the start memory digestion order. Next, the start memory display 41b is shuffled as shown in FIG. 82 (b), and then the start memory display 41b is aligned with the start line as shown in FIG. 82 (c), as shown in FIG. 82 (d). The race starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), the race ends when one start memory display 41b finishes at the end of the special figure variation display game, and thereafter, the start memory corresponding to the start memory display 41b that has scored. A special figure variation display game based on the above is started. In addition, the start memory display 41b that did not finish returns to the start point.

  In addition, when shuffling is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (b), a hold prefetch suggestion display based on the prefetch result can be displayed. By performing such a hold prefetching suggestion display, the start memory display 41b on which the hold prefetching suggestion display is made can score in a race, and the expectation for executing the next special figure variation display game can be increased. Interest can be improved.

[Fluctuation processing]
In order to perform such a hold fluctuation, the changing process shown in FIG. 83 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In this process during fluctuation, the processes of steps B321 to B324 regarding the hold fluctuation are not performed. When there is no production request flag (step B121; No), a hold variation setting process (step B421) is performed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the processing from step B334 to B340 regarding the hold variation is not performed in the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG.

[Pending variation setting processing]
As shown in FIG. 84, in the above-described hold fluctuation setting process (step B421), first, it is checked whether there is a hold fluctuation executable flag (step B431), and if there is a hold fluctuation executable flag (step B432; Yes). ) Determines whether it is the hold fluctuation start timing (step B433). If it is not the hold fluctuation start timing (step B433; No), the hold fluctuation setting process is terminated. If it is the hold fluctuation start timing (step B433; Yes), a hold fluctuation pattern setting process (step B434) is performed, and a scene sequence table corresponding to the set hold fluctuation pattern is set (step B435). Note that the scene sequence table for the on-hold variation is independent of the scene sequence table for the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Thereafter, the hold fluctuation time setting process (step B436) is performed, the hold fluctuation execution executable flag is cleared (step B437), the hold fluctuation execution flag is set (step B438), and the hold fluctuation setting process is terminated. As a result, the content of the hold fluctuation is determined and the hold fluctuation is started.

  On the other hand, if there is no pending variable execution flag (step B432; No), it is determined whether there is a pending variable execution flag (step B439). If there is no pending variable execution flag (step B439; No), the pending fluctuation execution flag is determined. The setting process ends. If there is a pending fluctuation execution flag (step B439; Yes), that is, if the pending fluctuation is being executed, it is determined whether the value of the update timer for managing the scene update time of the pending fluctuation is 0 (step) B440).

  If the value of this update timer is not 0 (step B440; No), the hold variation setting process is terminated. When the value of the update timer is 0 (step B440; Yes), the next scene data is set (step B441), and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the hold fluctuation (step B442). If it is not the end timing of the hold fluctuation (step B442; No), the hold fluctuation setting process is ended. If it is the end timing of the hold fluctuation (step B442; Yes), the end of the hold fluctuation is set (step B443), the hold fluctuation execution flag is cleared (step B444), and the hold fluctuation setting process is ended. .

  Note that the gaming machine of this modification does not perform the processing from steps B334 to B340 regarding the hold variation in the hold number command receiving process shown in FIG.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) changes the display order of the start memory display 41b based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be digested next. Will be displayed on the variable display device (display device 41).

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the third embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the start memory display 41b.

  When the gaming machine of this modification enters a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, the game control device 100 performs a falling lottery every time the special figure variable display game is executed, and a normal probability when the falling lottery is won. Transition to the state. That is, when the game control device 100 is in the high probability state, it constitutes a falling lottery means for performing a falling lottery for shifting to the normal probability state every time the variable display game is executed. Then, the production control device 300 has a high possibility of winning the falling lottery, a high probability of being a probable big hit that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, according to the display color of the start memory display 41b, a special The high probability of a normal big hit that becomes a normal probability state after the end of the gaming state is notified.

  FIG. 85 shows the relationship between the display color of the start memory display 41b and the notification content. It is notified that there is a high possibility of winning the falling lottery in the order of blue, yellow, green, and red. Further, in accordance with this order, it is notified that there is a high probability that it will be a probable big hit, and conversely, a notice that there is a low possibility of a normal big hit in this order. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, it is possible to indicate which content is being notified. For example, by displaying the characters “falling”, it is indicated that the possibility of winning the falling lottery is being notified. Similarly, by displaying the “probable change” character, it indicates that the probability of being a probable big hit is informed, and by displaying the “normal” character, it is likely to be a normal big win. Is indicated.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs the process shown in FIG. 87 in the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B212). In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control apparatus 100 also determines whether or not to win the falling lottery in the pre-reading process, and this result is also transmitted as a pre-read command. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the fall control lottery is won in the effect control device 300.

  Thereafter, prefetch information relating to the hold is acquired (step B451), a hold display mode based on the prefetch information is set (step B452), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. In the process of setting the hold display mode based on the pre-read information (step B452), the display mode of the start memory display 41b as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 is selected.

  Further, it is possible to have the same configuration as that of the third modified example of the third embodiment described above, and to execute the hold fluctuation (shuffle display) as shown in FIG. At this time, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), it is possible to improve the interest in the race shown in FIGS. 88 (c) to 88 (e) by notifying the pre-read information by the display color. Note that the display color of the start memory display 41b may be changed at the same time as the start memory is generated, or the start memory display 41b may be changed in the middle of the hold variation as shown in FIG. good.

  The example shown in FIG. 88 is a high-probability state, and as shown in FIG. 88 (b), pre-reading effects in the red and yellow display colors are performed on the start memory display 41b. In this case, even if the start memory is pre-determined that the possibility of a special result in the high probability state is high, if the winning lottery is won before the start memory, the normal probability state, The result of the variable display game based on the start memory may not be a special result. Therefore, in the races shown in FIGS. 88 (c) to 88 (e), if the red start memory display 41b finishes first, there is a high possibility of winning the falling lottery, and the yellow start memory display 41b is less likely to be a big hit. turn into. For this reason, the player comes to be interested in which start memory display 41b finishes first, and can perform an unprecedented high performance.

  From the above, after the end of the special game state, the probability control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal probability state, and the high Falling lottery means (game control device 100) for performing a falling lottery for shifting to the normal probability state each time the variable display game is executed in the case of a probability state, and a preliminary result determination means (game control device 100) In the determination result of the start memory according to, information on whether or not the result of the variable display game based on the start memory becomes a special result in the probability state at the time of determination by the prior result determination means, and whether or not to win the falling lottery In addition, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) changes the display order of the start memory display 41b based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and then determines the preliminary result in the start memory display 41b. And thus stage determination result can be clearly informed.

  Note that the configurations of the third embodiment and the modifications of the third embodiment can be applied in appropriate combination. Furthermore, the configurations of the first and second embodiments and the modifications of the first and second embodiments can be applied in appropriate combinations. In this case, if there is a conflicting process, the process may be distributed depending on conditions or arbitrarily.

  Next, the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to perform a pre-reading effect on the start-up memory display 41b in accordance with a predetermined operation of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  In the display area of the display device 41 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the center is a variable display area 41z for displaying the identification information of the decoration special figure variable display game. The area below the variable display area 41z is a first start memory display area 41m that displays the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first start memory, and the area above the variable display area 41z corresponds to the second start memory. The second start memory display area 41n displays the start memory display 41b to be displayed.

  The start memory display 41b displayed in the first start memory display area 41m and the second start memory display area 41n is displayed in order from the left end in accordance with the corresponding start memory digestion order. Of the start memory displays 41b displayed side by side, the left end start memory display 41b is positioned above and below the left end identification information of the identification information in the variable display area 41z. The second and third start memory displays 41b from the left of the start memory display 41b are positioned above and below the second and third identification information from the left of the identification information in the variable display area 41z. ing. Thus, the identification information and the position of the start memory display 41b are made to correspond to each other, and a pre-reading effect on the start memory display 41b is performed according to a predetermined operation of the identification information.

  FIGS. 89 (b) to 89 (f) show an example of prefetching effects. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), first, a character appears in a state where the identification information is variably displayed, suggesting that a prefetch effect may be performed. As shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the identification information at the left end stops, the identification information is concealed by being overlapped in front of the start memory display 41b displayed in the first start memory display area 41m below. The operation of returning to the variable display area 41z is performed later. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the pre-reading effect (in this case, the display of “!!!!”) is performed on the concealed start memory display 41b. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), when the third identification information from the left stops, the identification information is displayed in front of the start memory display 41b displayed in the first start memory display area 41m below. After overlapping and concealing, an operation of returning to the variable display area 41z is performed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), a pre-reading effect (here, “?!” Display) is performed on the concealed start-up memory display 41b.

  By using such a pre-reading effect, it is possible to perform a novel start-up memory display that has not been made in the past, and to continue to expect. Further, it is possible to relate the change in the start memory display 41b to the operation of the identification information. For example, even when the result is not reached and the result is out of the reach, the change display of the identification information itself is interested or expected. Since the game can be held, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the identification information is superimposed on the front side of the start memory display 41b, the start memory display 41b is once hidden by the identification information when the start memory display 41b is changed. Furthermore, the identification information is the one most noticed by the player. By following this operation, the result of the prior determination is also seen, and the result of the prior determination can be notified reliably.

  FIG. 90 shows types of prefetch effects and selection probabilities. There are various types of look-ahead effects, such as a character display indicating a high probability of winning, a “heat” display, and a “SP” display indicating a high probability of SP reach. ing. Then, a display is selected with a predetermined probability based on the prefetch result of the start-up memory that is the target of the prefetch effect. For example, when the pre-reading effect is made on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory whose result is a big hit (special result), the probability that the character display is selected is 30%. ! ”,“? ”,“ Ska ”, and“ SP ”are each selected with a probability of 10%, and“ Heat ”is selected with a probability of 20%.

  Also, the prefetching effect as shown in FIG. 89 is performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern of the variation time in which the prefetching effect can be executed is set. FIG. 91 shows an example of the variation pattern. When the result is a big hit, there are two types of variation patterns that have a variation time of 20 seconds in normal reach, and when one of these variation patterns is selected, a pre-reading effect is performed. If the result is out of order, the pre-reading effect can be executed when the fluctuation time is 20 seconds in the fluctuation pattern without reach. In the variation pattern in which this pre-reading effect can be executed, the operation of the identification information as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) to 89 (f) is performed. It should be noted that the variation pattern capable of executing the prefetch effect may be arbitrarily set as long as the variation time sufficient to execute the prefetch effect is set.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs the process shown in FIG. 92 in the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening winning effect command, winning effect symbol command) has been received (step B461). If not received (step B461; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it is received (step B461; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B462), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated.

[Fluctuation processing]
In addition, the changing process shown in FIG. 93 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In the changing process, as will be described later, in the changing pattern information setting process (step B124), settings relating to the pre-reading effect (specific effect) are performed. When the value of the update timer is 0 (step B130; Yes), a specific effect information setting process (step B463) that is a process related to execution control of the prefetch effect (specific effect) is performed. Note that in the in-fluctuating process shown in FIG. 93, the process related to the prior notification (steps B132 to 134 in FIG. 30) is not performed, but the process related to the prior notification may be performed.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
FIG. 94 shows the variation pattern information setting process (step B124) in the above-described variation process. In this variation pattern information setting process, first, stop symbol information of the special-figure variation display game is acquired (step B471), and the hold information that is information relating to the start memory is saved (step B472). Next, the gaming state such as the probability state, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37, and the effect mode is acquired (step B473), and the effect information stored in the start storage area is acquired (step B474). The effect information is information that is set for the start-up memory that is the target of the prefetch effect when the prefetch effect based on the prefetch information is executed.

  Thereafter, a stop symbol of the special display variation display game is set (step B475), and a variation pattern corresponding to the command is determined based on the game state and the effect information (step B476). Then, it is checked whether the variation pattern can execute the specific effect (prefetching effect) (step B477). If the variation pattern cannot execute the specific effect (prefetching effect) (step B478; No), the variation pattern information is displayed. The setting process ends. Further, when the variation pattern can execute the specific effect (pre-reading effect) (step B478; Yes), the hold display switching information setting process (step B479) is performed, and the variation pattern information setting process is ended.

[Hold display switching information setting process]
FIG. 95 shows the hold display switching information setting process (step B479) in the above-described variation pattern information setting process. In this hold display switching information setting process, first, it is checked whether there is information in the hold storage area that is the target of the specific effect (prefetch effect) (step B481). The reserved storage areas that are the targets of the specific effects here are the first reserved that is digested earliest in the first start memory and the third reserved that is digested third. In the first hold, the corresponding start memory display 41b is displayed on the left end of the first start memory display area 41m, and in the third hold, the corresponding start memory display 41b is on the left of the first start memory display area 41m. Is displayed third, and a pre-reading effect as shown in FIG. 89 is possible.

  When there is no information in any of the first reserved storage area and the third reserved storage area (step B482; No), that is, when the first starting storage number is 0 to 2 and there is no at least third hold Then, it is determined whether there is a first hold (step B483). If there is a first hold (step B483; Yes), information in the first hold storage area is acquired (step B484), and a specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed for the first hold based on the acquired information. First hold display switching information that is information to that effect is set (step B485). Then, the specific effect information which is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is ended. On the other hand, when there is no first hold (step B483; No), the specific effect information that is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is terminated. . In this case, as described later, if the first hold or the third hold occurs before the execution timing of the specific effect, the specific effect is performed.

  Further, when there is information in both the first reserved storage area and the third reserved storage area (step B482; Yes), that is, the first starting storage number is 3 or 4, and the first and third reserved areas If there is, information on the first and third reserved storage areas is acquired (step B486). And based on the acquired information, the 1st hold | maintenance display switching information which is the information to perform a specific effect (prefetch effect) about 1st hold is set (step B487), and also 3rd based on the acquired information. The third hold display switching information, which is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed for the hold, is set (step B488). Then, the specific effect information which is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is ended.

[Specific production information setting process]
FIG. 96 shows the specific effect information setting process (step B461) in the above-described variation pattern information setting process. In this specific effect information setting process, first, it is checked whether or not there is specific effect information that is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetching effect) is to be executed (step B491), and when there is no specific effect information (step B492; No). Ends the specific effect setting process. If there is specific effect information (step B492; Yes), it is checked whether it is the hold display switching timing (step B493).

  The hold display switching timing is a timing at which the start memory display 41b is concealed as shown in FIGS. 89 (c) and 89 (e) and then the state shown in FIGS. 89 (d) and 89 (f) is obtained. If it is not the hold display switching timing (step B494; No), the specific effect information setting process is terminated. If it is the hold display switching timing (step B494; Yes), whether there is information (first or third hold display switching information) in the hold storage area (first or third hold storage area) to be switched. Check (step B495).

  If there is information (step B496; Yes), it is checked whether the switching target is the first hold (step B497), and if it is the first hold (step B498; Yes), the first hold display switching is performed. Based on the information, the first hold switching flag is set (step B499). Thereafter, the first hold effect information is set based on the first hold display switching information (step B500), and the specific effect information setting process is terminated. The first hold effect information includes information indicating which of the displays shown in FIG. 90 is used as the start storage display 41b corresponding to the first hold. When the switching target is not the first hold (step B498; No), the third hold switching flag is set based on the third hold display switching information (step B501). Thereafter, the third hold effect information is set based on the third hold display switching information (step B502), and the specific effect information setting process is terminated. The third hold effect information includes information as to which of the displays shown in FIG. 90 is used as the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold.

  On the other hand, when there is no information (first or third hold display switching information) in the area corresponding to the switching symbol (first or third hold storage area) (step B496; No), the switching information addition setting process (step B503) ) To finish the specific effect information setting process.

[Switching information addition setting process]
FIG. 97 shows the switching information addition setting process (step B503) in the specific effect information setting process described above. In this switching information addition setting process, first, it is checked whether the switching target is the first holding (step B511). If the switching target is the first holding (step B512; Yes), is there holding information in the first holding storage area? Is checked (step B513).

  And when there is no 1st hold information (Step B514; No), ie, when the 1st starting storage number is 0, switching information addition setting processing is ended. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not performed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold. Moreover, when there exists 1st pending | holding information (step B514; Yes), ie, when the 1st starting memory | storage number is 1 or more, the pending | holding information of a 1st pending | holding storage area is acquired (step B515), and the acquired pending | holding Based on the information, the first hold switching flag is set (step B516). Thereafter, the first hold effect information is set based on the acquired hold information (step B517), and the switching information addition setting process is ended.

  Thus, even when there is no first hold at the start of the special figure variation display game in which the prefetch effect is performed, the prefetch is performed when the first hold occurs before the execution timing of the prefetch effect in which the identification information on the left side stops. Production will be performed.

  On the other hand, when the switching target is not the first holding (step B512; No), that is, when the switching target is the third holding, it is checked whether there is holding information in the third holding storage area (step B518). And when there is no 3rd hold information (Step B519; No), ie, when the 1st starting storage number is less than 3, switching information addition setting processing is ended. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not performed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold. Further, when there is third hold information (step B519; Yes), that is, when the first starting storage number is 3 or more, the hold information in the third hold storage area is acquired (step B520), and the acquired hold is acquired. Based on the information, a third hold switching flag is set (step B521). Thereafter, the third hold effect information is set based on the acquired hold information (step B522), and the switching information addition setting process is ended.

  Thus, even when there is no third hold at the start of the special figure variation display game in which the prefetch effect is performed, the prefetch is performed when the third hold occurs before the prefetch effect execution timing at which the right identification information stops. Production will be performed.

[Pending display processing]
The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 performs a hold display process shown in FIG. 98 as a display control process in the start memory display area 41a. In this hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number (step B531). If there is the hold number display data (step B532; Yes), the hold display switching setting is performed based on the display switching information due to the change in the hold number (step B541), the hold display setting process is performed (step B542), and the hold is held. The display process ends. With this process, the start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases.

  On the other hand, when there is no number-of-holds display data (step B532; No), a hold switching flag (first or third hold switching flag) set when changing the start memory display 41b associated with the pre-reading effect (specific effect). ) Is checked. If there is no hold switching flag (step B534; No), the hold display process is terminated. If there is a hold switching flag (step B534; Yes), it is checked whether it is the first hold switching flag (step B535).

  If it is the first hold switching flag (step B536; Yes), the first hold display switching setting is performed based on the first hold effect information (step B539), and the first hold switching flag is cleared (step B540). ), The hold display process is terminated. By this process, the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold is changed. When the flag is not the first hold switching flag (step B536; No), the third hold display switching setting is performed based on the third hold effect information (step B537), and the third hold switching flag is cleared (step B538). The hold display process is terminated. By this process, the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold is changed.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), a variable display device (special display) that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. In the gaming machine having the display 51, the special display 2 52, and the display device 41) and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result A start winning memory means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as an execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area, and a start winning memory The random number stored as the start memory in the means is stored in the advance result determination means (game control device 100) for determining before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed, and in the start winning storage means. Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for controlling the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory, and the start memory display control means is configured to perform predetermined identification information in the variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In accordance with the operation, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect that suggests the determination result of the prior result determination means in the start memory display 41b.

  The game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the execution of the variable display game is provided, and the predetermined condition is that the game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) has a specific change pattern as the execution mode of the variable display game. The predetermined operation of the identification information in the variation display game having the specific variation pattern is an operation in which the identification information is superimposed on the front side of the start memory display 41b.

  In addition, although the identification information is moved up and down and the pre-reading effect is performed by the stop timing of the corresponding identification information, the identification information is moved up and down based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the pre-reading effect is generated. It may be performed. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the timing for stopping the corresponding identification information (here, the identification information on the left side) is reached, a display prompting the player to operate the effect button 25 is performed. Then, based on the player operating the effect button 25, the identification information is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 99 (b), and the pre-read effect is performed as shown in FIG. 99 (c).

  By doing in this way, a player can participate in prefetching production, and interest is improved. In addition, a player who does not want to know the prefetch result may not have to operate the effect button 25, and a prefetch effect according to the player's preference can be obtained. From the above, the operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control device 300 has the game execution control means (game control device 100) select a specific variation pattern and the operation unit. When the operation is performed, the predetermined operation of the identification information is performed, and the start memory display control unit (the effect control device 300) performs the advance result determination unit (in the start memory display 41b according to the predetermined operation of the identification information). The pre-reading effect suggesting the determination result of the game control apparatus 100) can be executed. Further, the prefetch effect may be performed even when the player does not operate the effect button 25, and the prefetch result may be more clearly notified when the effect button 25 is operated.

  Further, when the reach state is reached but the result is out of order, the pre-reading effect may be performed. In this way, even when the reach state is reached and the result is out of place, the change display of the identification information itself can be given interest and expectation, so that expectation can be given.

  FIG. 100 shows a display example in the case of performing a pre-reading effect when the reach state is reached but the result is out of place. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the reach state is reached and the result is not as shown in FIG. 100 (b), a character indicating that a pre-reading effect is performed as shown in FIG. 100 (c). To appear. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the center identification information that was stopped last is moved up and down so as to hide the start-up storage display 41b that is the target of the pre-reading effect that is arbitrarily selected. As shown in FIG.

  Such a pre-reading effect may be always performed when there is a shift in the reach state, but it is performed, for example, when there is a start memory that results in a special result, and clearly that the start memory exists. By notifying, even when the result is out of order, the expectation can be maintained until the end, and the interest can be improved.

  From the above, the predetermined condition is that the game execution control means (game control device 100) selects the variation pattern including the reach state as the execution mode of the variation display game, and the variation becomes the variation pattern including the reach state. The predetermined operation of the identification information in the display game is an operation in which the identification information to be stopped last is superimposed on the front side of the start-up storage display 41b when the result is a reach state and the result is lost.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the special figure variation display game that is the predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as the specific variation pattern, and the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game has not yet occurred. In a state where there is no information, a prior notification indicating information related to the start-up memory is performed. The gaming machine of this embodiment also has this configuration, but it is also possible to omit this prior notification configuration and use the configuration of this embodiment alone.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can be notified in advance for notifying information about start-up memory that has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of prior notification in the gaming machine of this modification. In this example, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the special figure variation display game for performing the pre-reading effect is being executed, but there is no third hold. In this state, when it is time to execute the pre-reading effect for the third hold, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), even when there is no third hold, the identification information is moved up and down to correspond to the third hold. An operation of hiding the portion where the display 41b is displayed is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third suspension that has not yet occurred is displayed in advance for the start memory. In this prior notification, a display in which the area where the start memory display 41b is displayed is surrounded by a dotted line, and information on the special figure variation display game based on the start memory (here, “!!!!”) is displayed in advance. A notification display 41c is displayed. Similar advance notification can be performed even when there is no first hold.

  In order to perform such display, in the switching information addition setting process shown in FIG. 97, when there is no first hold information (step B514; No) or when there is no third hold information (step B519; No), advance notification Process to display. Such a prior notification is configured to change the variation pattern selection table at a predetermined timing (such as when a variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit) as in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, Depending on the timing when the variation pattern selection table is changed, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game set in advance before the occurrence of the start-up memory may be notified. The reliability of the game is secured, and the player can have a further expectation. In addition, an arbitrarily selected prefetch effect may be displayed. In addition, the content of the prior notification may be information related to the execution of the variable display game. For example, information on the setting or change of reach type, advance notice type, stage (background) type, character type, mode type, etc. is notified. To do.

  In this way, the advance notification for notifying the start memory that has not yet occurred is made possible, so that even if there is no start memory, it is possible to execute the advance notice to the player, and the novel advance notice. Production can be performed. In addition, since the player tries to generate a corresponding start memory, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) responds to a predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred in accordance with a predetermined operation of the identification information in the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. In the area where the start memory display 41b to be displayed is displayed, it is possible to execute prior notification that suggests information related to the execution of the variable display game based on the predetermined start memory.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can execute a pre-reading effect a plurality of times for the start memory display 41b corresponding to the same start memory.

  FIG. 102 shows an example of a prefetch effect in the gaming machine of this modification. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), as shown in FIGS. 89 (e) and 89 (f), a pre-reading effect is performed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be digested third in the first start memory, The start memory is a start memory to be digested next in the first start memory. From this state, when the left side identification information is stopped as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the identification information is concealed by being overlapped in front of the start memory display 41b displayed in the first start memory display area 41m below. After that, the operation of returning to the variable display area 41z is performed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), the pre-reading effect of the concealed start-up memory display 41b changes (in this case, the display changes to “ska”).

  FIG. 103 shows the types of prefetch effects and the selection probabilities. Here, the first time is the selection probability when the pre-reading effect is executed from the state where the pre-reading effect is not executed, and the finished is a start memory display corresponding to the same start memory as shown in FIG. This is the selection probability when the second pre-reading effect for 41b is executed. The selection probability in the case where the second pre-reading effect is executed than the first time is a selection probability that can clearly notify the pre-read result. In the second pre-reading effect, the variation pattern and the result may be directly notified with character information so as to be clearer.

  By making such a pre-reading effect, a plurality of pre-reading effects can be performed for the same start-up memory, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further increased, and even if the reach state is not achieved, the result is not good Even in this case, interest and expectation can be given to the variation display of the identification information itself, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Specific production information setting process]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control device 300 performs a specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. 104 in place of the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. In this specific effect information setting process, after setting the third hold effect information (step B502) based on the third hold display switching information, the third hold effect information is set (step B551). This third hold effected information is set for the start memory in which the prefetch effect is executed in the case of the third hold, and is information indicating that the start memory has already executed the prefetch effect. .

[Hold display switching information setting process]
Also, the hold display switching information setting process shown in FIG. 105 is performed instead of the hold display switching information setting process shown in FIG. In the hold display switching information setting process, first, it is checked whether there is information in the hold storage areas (the first hold storage area and the third hold storage area) that are targeted for the specific effect (prefetch effect) (step B481). If there is no information in any area (step B482; No), it is determined whether there is a first hold (step B483).

  If there is a first hold (step B483; Yes), information on the first hold storage area is acquired (step B484), and information on the third hold effected information area is acquired (step B561). As described above, the third hold effect completed information is information that is set when the prefetch effect is performed when the start-up storage is the third hold. That is, when this information is present, the second prefetch effect is performed.

  Thereafter, first hold display switching information, which is information indicating that a specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed for the first hold, is set based on the acquired hold information and effected information (step B562). Furthermore, the specific effect information which is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is ended. On the other hand, when there is no first hold (step B483; No), the specific effect information that is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is terminated. . As will be described later, if the first hold or the third hold occurs before the execution timing of the specific effect, the specific effect is performed.

  If there is information in any area (step B482; Yes), the information of the first and third reserved storage areas is acquired (step B486), and the information of the third reserved effected information area is acquired (step B486). Step B563). Thereafter, first hold display switching information, which is information indicating that a specific effect (pre-reading effect) is executed for the first hold, is set based on the acquired hold information and effected information (step B564). Furthermore, the third hold display switching information, which is information indicating that the specific effect (prefetch effect) is executed for the third hold based on the acquired hold information and the effected information, is set (step B565), and the specific effect (prefetch effect) The specific effect information that is the information to execute is set (step B489), and the hold display switching information setting process is terminated.

  Note that the third hold display effected information need not be considered when setting the third hold display switching information. In addition, when performing the second look-ahead effect, the start-up memory display 41b is not concealed by the vertical movement of the identification information, and the start-up memory display 41b that has been pre-readed in the third hold becomes the first hold. The display may be changed.

  From the above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times and execution of the pre-reading effect is determined for the same start memory display 41b, the start memory display control means (effect control device 300) The determination result of the game control device 100) can be notified more clearly.

  In addition, when performing the look-ahead effect several times about the same start memory display 41b, as shown in FIG. 106, you may make it conceal the start memory display 41b by each up-and-down operation | movement of several identification information.

  First, in the state where there is a third hold as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the corresponding identification information on the right side is concealed by the up / down operation as shown in FIG. 106 (b), and as shown in FIG. 106 (c). A pre-reading production is performed. In the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the start memory for performing the pre-reading effect becomes the second hold and moves to the position corresponding to the central identification information. In this way, the identification information at the center is concealed by the up / down operation, and the prefetching effect changes as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 106 (g), the start memory for performing the pre-reading effect becomes the first hold and moves to the position corresponding to the identification information on the left side. As shown in the figure, the identification information at the center is concealed by the vertical movement, and the prefetching effect changes as shown in FIG.

  Even with such a pre-reading effect, a plurality of pre-reading effects can be performed for the same start-up memory, so that the player's expectation can be further increased, and even if the reach state is not reached, the result is obtained. Even in the case of losing, the interest display and the expectation can be given to the fluctuation display of the identification information itself, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In the case of performing an effect as shown in FIG. 106, the variation pattern of the decorative special-figure display game corresponding to each special-figure display game that performs a plurality of consecutive prefetch effects in the effect control device 300 is used as the prefetch effect. The identification information that stops at the position of the start memory display 41b that is the target of the setting is set to a variation pattern that performs a predetermined operation.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification can execute a plurality of prefetch effects on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the same start memory, and the operation of the identification information when performing the prefetch effects is different.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, when performing a pre-reading effect, each identification information is movable so as to hide each start memory display 41b. FIG. 107 shows an example of a prefetch effect that operates so as to hide the start memory display 41b in which the central identification information performs the prefetch effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a state where there is a third hold, a prefetch effect is performed a plurality of times for the third hold.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (b), when it is time to stop the central identification information, the central identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold, and FIG. 107 (c) As shown, a pre-reading effect is performed. In this way, when the identification information moves toward the start memory display 41b that performs the pre-reading effect, the display position of the start memory display 41b may not correspond to the display position of the identification information.

  In the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), since the start memory for performing the pre-reading effect is put on the second hold, the central identification information is shown in FIG. 107 (e). The up-and-down operation is performed so as to hide the start-up memory display 41b corresponding to the second hold, and the pre-reading effect changes as shown in FIG. 107 (f). Furthermore, in the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), the start memory for performing the pre-reading effect becomes the first hold, and therefore, the central identification information as shown in FIG. 107 (h). Moves up and down so as to conceal the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold, and the pre-reading effect changes as shown in FIG. 107 (i).

  In FIG. 107, the identification information that is stopped and displayed as the central identification information moves up and down. However, as shown in FIG. 108, identification information other than the stop display as the central identification information is displayed in the start memory display 41b. May be concealed.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the timing immediately before the central identification information is stopped, the identification information immediately before the identification information to be stopped as the central identification information is the start storage display 41b corresponding to the third hold. As shown in FIG. 108 (c), a pre-reading effect is performed in front of the start memory display 41b so as to hide it. Also in the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), the identification information immediately before the identification information to be stopped as the central identification information is concealed from the start memory display 41b corresponding to the second hold. In FIG. 108 (f), the prefetch effect is changed as shown in FIG. Further, in the next special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 108 (h), the identification information immediately before the identification information to be stopped as the central identification information conceals the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold. As shown in FIG. 108 (i), the pre-reading effect is changed.

  Thus, since each identification information is movable so as to hide each start memory display 41b, the pre-reading effect is also executed for the start memory display 41b other than the start memory display 41b corresponding to the position of the identification information. It becomes possible, and the range of pre-reading production is expanded. For example, until the pre-reading effect is performed, it is not known which start storage display 41b the pre-reading effect is made, and the interest for the pre-reading effect can be improved. In addition, by using the central identification information, it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect even if the fluctuation pattern is very short and the fluctuation time is selected when the number of start memories is large.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 109 instead of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening winning effect command, winning effect symbol command) has been received (step B461). If not received (step B461; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it is received (step B461; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B462).

  Next, it is determined whether a prefetch effect (specific effect) is being executed (step B571). If the prefetch effect is being executed (step B571; Yes), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step B571; No), the pre-reading information is acquired and it is checked whether the specific effect is executable (step B572).

  The specific effect executable hold is, for example, a start memory in which the result is a big hit, a start memory in which a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, reach state), or a start memory arbitrarily selected but not any of them. If it is not this specific effect executable hold (step B573; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. Further, if the specific effect execution is on hold (step B573; Yes), the number-of-holds information is acquired (step B574), and it is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (step B575).

  If it is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number (step B575; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. The predetermined number is, for example, two, and the prefetch effect is not performed when the period during which the prefetch effect can be executed is short. If the number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (step B575; Yes), the specific prefetch effect information is saved in the reserved storage area corresponding to the prefetch effect (step B576), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated.

  The reserved storage area corresponding to the pre-reading effect is a reserved storage area corresponding to the start-up memory for executing the special figure variation display game in which the pre-reading effect is executed, and the start-up memory that is consumed before the specific effect executable hold is executed. It corresponds to. Note that the number of reserved storage areas for saving the specific prefetch effect information may be selected based on the prefetch result of the specific effect executable hold. For example, if the specific effect executable hold is a special result, the number of reserved storage areas for saving the specific prefetch effect information is increased, and the more prefetch effect is more likely to be a special result. You may make it suggest.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
Also, the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. 110 is performed instead of the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern information setting process, after performing the processing from step B471 to B475, a variation pattern corresponding to the command is provisionally determined based on the gaming state and effect information (step B581). Thereafter, information on the reserved storage area is acquired (step B582), and it is checked whether there is specific prefetch effect information (step B583).

  When there is no specific prefetch effect information (step B584; No), that is, when no prefetch effect is performed, the tentatively determined variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the variation (step B586), and the variation pattern information setting process ends. To do. If there is specific prefetch effect information (step B584; Yes), that is, if a prefetch effect is to be performed, a variation information change setting process (step B585) is performed, and the variation pattern information setting process is terminated.

[Variation information change setting process]
FIG. 111 shows the variation information setting process (step B585) in the variation pattern information setting process described above. In this variation information setting process, first, information on the tentatively determined variation pattern is acquired (step B591), information on the reserved storage area is acquired (step B592), and the corresponding hold display switching is performed based on the acquired information. Information is set (step B593). The hold display switching information includes information on how to display the start memory display 41b.

  Next, a corresponding variation pattern is acquired based on the hold display switching information (step B594), and the acquired variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the variation (step B595). Then, the specific effect information is set (step B596), and the variation information change setting process is terminated. The variation pattern based on the hold display switching information is a variation pattern including the operation of the identification information at the center according to the position of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched.

  In the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. 96, in the process (step B495) for checking whether there is information in the hold storage area to be switched, the first, second, or third hold storage area has the first, It is checked whether there is second or third hold display switching information. When there is information, the first, second or third hold switching flag and the first, second or third hold effect information are set based on the corresponding hold display switching information. In the hold display process shown in FIG. 98, when there is a hold switching flag (step B534), it is checked whether it is the first, second, or third hold switching flag, and the corresponding hold display switching setting is made. And clear the corresponding hold switch flag. As a result, the pre-reading effect as shown in FIGS. 107 and 108 can be executed.

  As the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, the result mode is derived by performing unit fluctuation display that is stopped after the plurality of identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. The pseudo-continuous variation mode to be selected can be selected, and a prefetch effect may be performed in each unit variation display.

  FIG. 112 shows an example in which a prefetch effect is performed in each unit variation display in the pseudo continuous variation mode. In this example, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in a state where there is a third hold, a prefetch effect is performed a plurality of times for the third hold.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the central identification information stops at the first unit variation display, the vertical identification operation is performed so that the central identification information hides the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold. Then, a pre-reading effect is performed as shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 112 (c) is a temporary stop state, and the identification information is displayed so as to shake, indicating that the special figure variation display game has not ended.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (d), the start memory that performed the pre-reading effect in the next unit variation display remains in the third hold state. 3 The up-and-down operation is performed so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the hold, and the pre-reading effect changes as shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 112 (g), the start memory that has performed the pre-reading effect in the next unit variation display remains in the third pending state, so that the central identification information is shown in FIG. 112 (h). The up-and-down operation is performed so as to hide the start-up memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold, and the pre-reading effect changes as shown in FIG. 112 (i).

[Variation information change setting process]
In order to perform such display, a variation information change setting process shown in FIG. 113 is performed instead of the variation information change setting process shown in FIG. In this variation information change setting process, after performing the processing of steps B591 to B593, it is determined whether or not the tentatively determined variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern (pseudo-continuous variation mode) (step B601).

  If it is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern (step B601; Yes), the tentatively determined variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the variation (step B604), and the variation information change setting process ends. If it is not a pseudo continuous variation pattern (step B601; No), a corresponding pseudo continuous variation pattern is acquired based on the hold display switching information (step B602), and the acquired pseudo continuous variation pattern is used as the variation pattern of the variation. After determining (step B603), the variation information change setting process is terminated. By this processing, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game for performing the prefetching effect becomes a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, and the prefetching effect as shown in FIG. 112 can be executed.

  In addition, when performing a prefetch effect several times only with a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, in the process of saving the specific prefetch effect information in the corresponding reserved storage area in the prefetch command reception process (step B576), the target start memory is stored. Only to save specific prefetch effect information. It is also possible to perform a pre-reading effect with a variation pattern that is not a pseudo-continuous variation pattern after performing a plurality of pre-reading representations with a pseudo-continuous variation pattern. In this case, in the fluctuation information change setting process shown in FIG. 113, it is possible to select whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game for performing the pre-reading effect is the pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern.

  In this way, by performing the prefetching effect in each unit variation display of the pseudo continuous variation mode, it is possible to improve the interest for each prefetching effect in addition to the improvement of the interest by the unit variation display of a plurality of times.

  From the above, the game execution control means (game control device 100) performs the unit variation display that stops after the plurality of identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the variation display game, and displays the result mode. Select and execute either the normal variation mode to be derived or the pseudo-variable variation mode in which the unit variation display is performed two or more times and the result mode is derived during execution of the variation display game. The predetermined condition is that the game execution control means selects the pseudo continuous variation mode as the execution mode of the variable display game. In the pseudo continuous variation mode, the predetermined information of the identification information is set for each unit variation display. The operation is performed, and the start-up storage display control means (production control device 300) can execute the pre-reading production for each unit variation display executed in the pseudo continuous variation mode.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure change display game set as the pseudo continuous change pattern becomes a special result and there is a start memory that becomes a special result, the existence of the start memory may be clearly notified. FIG. 114 shows an example of such a case.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), a pre-reading effect is made in each unit variation display for the third hold, and in the last unit variation display, a reach state is achieved as shown in FIG. 114 (b). Special results have been derived as shown in c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the central identification information is moved up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the display is changed to a display that clearly shows that the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory has a special result (in this case, a display of “certain”).

  Further, in the series of pre-reading effects, the pre-reading effects for the same start memory are performed a plurality of times. However, the pre-reading effects may be performed for the plurality of start memories in the series of pre-read effects. Further, for example, the start memory number (holding number) that is a target of the pre-reading effect may be notified by displaying a character as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a prefetch effect is performed for a plurality of start memories in a series of prefetch effects. This example is an example in which pre-reading effects are performed for the second hold and the third hold in a state where there is a third hold as shown in FIG. In this case, a character 41p indicating that a pre-reading effect is performed for two holds is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when the right side identification information comes to a stop, the right side identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold, and in FIG. 116 (c). As shown, a pre-reading effect is performed. Furthermore, as shown in 114 (c), when it is time to stop the central identification information, the central identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start-up storage display 41b corresponding to the second hold, and FIG. The pre-reading effect is performed as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 117 shows another example in which a prefetch effect is performed for a plurality of start memories in a series of prefetch effects. In this example, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), pre-reading effects are performed for all holdings in a state where there is a third holding. In this case, the character 41p indicating that the pre-reading effect is performed for all holdings is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the left side identification information comes to a stop, the left side identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first and second hold, and FIG. As shown in c), a pre-reading effect is performed. Then, as shown in 115 (c), when the right side identification information comes to a stop, the right side identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the fourth hold, and FIG. The pre-reading effect is performed as shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in 115 (d), when the central identification information comes to a stop, the central identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start-up storage display 41b corresponding to the third hold, and FIG. The pre-reading effect is performed as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), since the pre-reading effects can be performed simultaneously for the plurality of start memory displays 41b, a plurality of pre-read effects are performed for a specific start memory such as a start memory that is a special result. The start memory display 41b may be gradually changed to a display with high expectation (reliability).

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can perform a pre-reading effect on the second start memory.

  FIG. 118 shows an example of a prefetch effect for the second start memory. In this example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the pre-reading effect is performed for the first hold in the state where the first hold is in the second start-up memory. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the left identification information comes to a stop, the left identification information moves up and down so as to hide the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold, and FIG. 118 (c) As shown, a pre-reading effect is performed.

  Further, when the right identification information comes to a stop timing as shown in FIG. 118 (d) in the state where the third hold of the second start memory has not occurred, the start memory corresponding to the third hold is displayed. The display 41b moves up and down so as to conceal the displayed portion, and as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the notice hold display 41q for the first hold is performed. Except for the short-time state, the frequency of the second start-up memory is low, and even if it occurs, it rarely occurs until the third hold. Therefore, the interest of the pre-reading effect is improved by performing the notice hold display 41q for suggesting the first hold at the place where the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold is displayed.

[Specific production information setting process]
In order to perform the display as described above, the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. In this specific effect information setting process, the process from step B491 to B494 is performed, and if it is the hold display switching timing (step B494; Yes), it is checked whether there is special figure 2 hold information (step B611).

  When there is no special figure 2 hold information (step B612; No), that is, when there is no second start memory, a normal specific effect setting process (step B613) is performed, and the specific effect information setting process is terminated. In the normal specific effect setting process (step B613), the processes after step B495 in the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. 96 are performed. On the other hand, if there is special figure 2 hold information (step B612; Yes), that is, if there is a second start memory, a special figure 2 specific effect setting process (step B614) is performed, and the specific effect information setting process is terminated. .

[Special Figure 2 Specific Effect Setting Process]
FIG. 120 shows the special figure 2 specific effect setting process (step B614) in the specific effect information setting process described above. In this special figure 2 specific production setting process, first, it is checked whether or not the switching target is the first hold (step B621), and if it is the first hold (step B622; Yes), the special figure 2 first hold memory is stored. The area hold information is acquired (step B629). Thereafter, the special figure 2 first hold switching flag is set based on the acquired hold information (step B630), and the special figure 2 first hold effect information is set based on the acquired hold information (step B631). The setting process ends. The special figure 2 first hold effect information includes information on how to display the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold.

  When the switching target is not the first hold (step B622; No), it is checked whether there is hold information in the special figure 2 third hold storage area (step B623). If there is no special figure 2 third hold information (step B624; No), that is, if the second start memory number is 1 or 2, special figure 2 effect hold display processing (step B628) is performed. FIG. 2 ends the specific effect setting process.

  If there is special figure 2 third hold information (step B624; Yes), the hold information in the special figure 2 third hold storage area is acquired (step B625), and the special figure 2 3 is based on the acquired hold information. A hold switching flag is set (step B626). Thereafter, the special figure 2 third hold effect information is set based on the acquired hold information (step B627), and the special figure 2 specific effect setting process is ended. The special figure 2 third hold effect information includes information on how to display the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold.

[Special figure 2 effect hold display process]
FIG. 121 shows the special figure 2 effect hold display process (step B628) in the special figure 2 specific effect setting process described above. In this special figure 2 effect hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold information in the special figure 2 second hold storage area (step B641), and when there is special figure 2 second hold information (step B642; Yes). That is, when the second start memory number is 2, the special figure 2 effect hold display process is terminated.

  Further, when there is no special figure 2 second hold information (step B642; No), that is, when the second start memory number is 1, a notice hold display execution random number is obtained (step B643), and based on the obtained random number. It is determined whether the notice hold display is executed (step B644). Then, when the notice hold display is not executed (step B644; No), the special figure 2 effect hold display process ends. When the notice hold display is executed (step B644; Yes), the third notice hold display flag is set (step B645), and the special figure 2 third notice hold effect information is set (step B646). FIG. 2 The effect hold display process ends. The special figure 2 third notice hold effect information includes information on how to display the notice hold display 41q which is displayed in the portion where the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold is displayed.

  In the hold display process shown in FIG. 98, when there is a hold switch flag (step B534; Yes), the hold display switch setting corresponding to the set hold switch flag is performed. That is, when the first hold switch flag is set, the first hold switch setting is performed based on the first hold effect information, and the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold of the first start memory is switched. Further, when the third hold switching flag is set, the third hold switching setting is performed based on the third hold effect information, and the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold of the first start memory is switched.

  When the special figure 2 first hold switching flag is set, the special figure 2 first hold switching setting is made based on the special figure 2 first hold effect information, and corresponds to the first hold of the second start-up memory. The display of the start memory display 41b is switched. Further, when the special figure 2 third hold switching flag is set, the special figure 2 third hold switch setting is performed based on the special figure 2 third hold effect information, and corresponds to the third hold in the second start-up memory. The display of the start memory display 41b is switched. Further, when there is a hold switching flag (step B534; Yes), the case where the third notice hold display flag is set is included. In this case, the special notice is based on the special figure 2 third notice hold effect information. 2. The third hold switching setting is performed, and the notice hold display is displayed at the portion where the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold of the second start memory is displayed.

  Note that, even when it is set to execute the pre-reading effect for the first start memory, the pre-read effect for the second start memory is given priority, but the pre-read effect for the second start memory is the first. You may make it perform simultaneously with the prefetch effect about start memory. For example, when the identification information on the left side corresponding to the first hold stops, the pre-reading effect is performed by moving up and down so as to sequentially hide the first hold in the first start storage display area 41m and the second start storage display area 41n. You may make it do.

  Further, since the frequency of occurrence of the second start-up memory is low except in the short-time state, when there is a second hold of the second start-up memory, a pre-reading effect may be performed for the second hold. In addition, when the time is not short, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 may be lengthened with a predetermined probability so that the second start-up memory is easily generated and the above-described effects may be performed. Further, even in a gaming machine in which the second start memory is preferentially digested over the first start memory, the configuration of this modification can be applied without any problem.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area, a predetermined random number is extracted, and the starting winning memory means (game control device) stores the predetermined number as an upper limit as starting memory as the right to execute the variable display game 100) stores, as a first start memory, various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the first start winning area (start winning opening 36) as a first start memory, and a second start winning area (ordinary) The random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 37) is stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the starting memory display control means (the effect control device 300) Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the preliminary result determination means (game control device 10) in the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory according to the predetermined operation of the identification information in the variable display game. ) Determination results and thus is capable of executing suggest prefetching directing the.

  In addition, the start memory display control means (the effect control device 300), based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the start memory corresponding to the predetermined start memory that has not yet occurred according to the predetermined operation of the identification information in the variable display game. In the area where the display 41b is displayed, it is possible to execute a prior notification (notice hold display) that suggests information related to the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory that has already occurred.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to delay the display of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory when a specific start memory such as a start memory that has a special result occurs. Here, the case where the display of the start memory display 41b is subject to delay will be described as the case where a start memory that is a special result occurs as the first or third hold of the first start memory.

  FIG. 122 shows a display example on the display device 41 in the gaming machine of this modification. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), when a start memory that is a special result occurs in the state where two first start memories exist during execution of the special figure variation display game, the start memory display corresponding to the start memory is generated. 41b is not displayed, and the number of game balls that need to be awarded to the start winning opening 36 is notified instead. Here, it is informed that it is necessary to win two more game balls to the start winning opening 36.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (b), a prefetch effect is performed in the next special figure fluctuation display game. Then, when a winning as instructed as shown in FIG. 122 (c) does not occur and the right identification information stop timing comes as shown in FIG. 122 (d), as shown in FIG. 122 (e). The display delay of the start memory display 41b is released. In this case, the pre-reading effect is not performed on the start memory display 41b.

  On the other hand, when a winning as indicated in FIG. 122 (f) occurs and the right identification information stop timing is reached as shown in FIG. 122 (g), it is shown in FIG. 122 (h). As shown, the delay of the display of the start memory display 41b is released, and a prefetch effect is performed on the start memory display 41b. In the prefetch effect in this case, it is clearly notified that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory is a special result. By setting such an effect, the player can start to play the game ball in an attempt to know the result of the pre-reading, so that it can be prevented from being hit and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 123 in place of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening winning effect command, winning effect symbol command) has been received (step B461). If not received (step B461; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it is received (step B461; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B462), and it is determined whether the prefetch effect is being executed (step B651).

  If the pre-reading effect is being executed (step B651; Yes), the pre-read command receiving process is terminated. If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step B651; No), the pre-read information is acquired and it is checked whether the result is a big hit (special result) (step B652). If it is not a big hit (step B653; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. If it is a big hit (step B653; Yes), the number-of-holds information is acquired (step B654), and it is determined whether it is the first or third hold in FIG. 1 (first start memory) (step B655). ).

  If it is not the first or third hold in FIG. 1 (first start memory) (step B655; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. In the case of the first or third hold in FIG. 1 (first start-up storage) (step B655; Yes), the specific prefetch effect information is saved in the hold storage area corresponding to the prefetch effect (step B656). The reserved memory area corresponding to the pre-reading effect is a reserved memory area corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game for performing the pre-reading effect, and the special map variable display game for performing the effect as shown in FIG. This corresponds to the start memory to be executed. Thereafter, display delay information is set in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B657), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In place of the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 28, the pending number command reception process shown in FIG. 124 is performed. In the hold number command reception process, after the process related to the increase / decrease of the first start memory (steps B81 to B88), the process related to the delay display of the start memory display 41b is performed. In addition, after the processing related to the increase / decrease in the second start memory (steps B89 to B92), the pending number command reception processing is terminated. Here, the process related to the prior notification (steps B93 to B100 in FIG. 28) is not performed, but the process related to the prior notification may be performed.

  In the process related to the delay display, it is determined whether or not the delay display of the start memory display 41b is being performed (step B661). If the delay display is not being performed (step B661; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If the delay display is in progress (step B661; Yes), a delay prize counter for counting the number of winnings and the number of overflow winnings from the start winning opening 36 from the start of the effect as shown in FIG. (Step B662), it is determined whether the predetermined number has been reached (Step B663).

  The predetermined number is the number notified as the number of game balls that need to be won in the notification as shown in FIG. 122 (a), and is two in the example shown in FIG. If the predetermined number has not been reached (step B663; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. When the predetermined number is reached (step B663; Yes), the hold display confirmation information is set (step B664), and the hold number command receiving process is terminated.

  Note that the special figure 1 hold number display data is set (step B88) based on the updated contents so that the overflow command is also received (step B83; Yes), so that it is counted as a win. In this case, The special figure 1 hold number display data without change of the starting memory number is set.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
Also, instead of the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. 94, the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. 125 is performed. In this variation pattern information setting process, after performing the processing from step B471 to B475, the variation pattern corresponding to the command is provisionally determined based on the gaming state and the effect information (step B671). Thereafter, information on the reserved storage area is acquired (step B672), and it is checked whether there is display delay information (step B673).

  When there is no display delay information (step B674; No), the tentatively determined variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the variation (step B676), and the variation pattern information setting process ends. If there is display delay information (step B674; Yes), a variation information change setting process (step B675) is performed, and the variation pattern information setting process is terminated.

[Variation information change setting process]
FIG. 126 shows variation information setting processing (step B675) in the variation pattern information setting processing described above. In this variation information setting process, first, information on the tentatively determined variation pattern is acquired (step B681), information on the reserved storage area is acquired (step B682), and the corresponding hold display switching is performed based on the acquired information. Information is set (step B683). The hold display switching information includes information on how to display the start memory display 41b.

  Next, a corresponding variation pattern is acquired based on the hold display switching information (step B684), and the acquired variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the variation (step B685). Then, the specific effect information is set (step B686), and the variation information change setting process is ended. The variation pattern based on the hold display switching information is the identification information corresponding to the position of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory (start memory that delayed the display of the start memory display 41b) that is the target of the pre-reading effect. It is a variation pattern including operation.

[Specific production information setting process]
Also, the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the specific effect information setting process shown in FIG. In this specific effect information setting process, the process from step B491 to B498 is performed, and when the switching target is the first hold (step B498; Yes), the first hold switching flag is set based on the first hold display switching information. (Step B499).

  Thereafter, it is checked whether there is hold display confirmation information (step B691). If there is no hold display confirmation information (step B692; No), first hold production information is set based on the first hold display switching information (step B691). B500), the specific effect information setting process is terminated. Moreover, when there exists hold display confirmation information (step B692; Yes), 1st hold confirmation display information is set based on 1st hold display switching information (step B693), and specific production information setting processing is complete | finished. The first hold confirmation display information includes information indicating that the special result is clearly displayed in the start memory display 41b corresponding to the first hold.

  On the other hand, when the switching target is not the first hold (step B498; No), the third hold switching flag is set based on the third hold display switching information (step B501). Thereafter, it is checked whether there is hold display confirmation information (step B694). If there is no hold display confirmation information (step B695; No), the third hold production information is set based on the third hold display switching information (step B695). B502), the specific effect information setting process is terminated. If there is hold display confirmation information (step B695; Yes), the third hold confirmation display information is set based on the third hold display switching information (step B696), and the specific effect information setting process is terminated. As shown in FIG. 122 (h), the third hold confirmation display information includes information indicating that a special result is clearly displayed on the start memory display 41b corresponding to the third hold.

[Pending display processing]
In addition, a hold display process shown in FIG. 128 is performed instead of the hold display process shown in FIG. In this hold display process, first, it is checked whether there is hold number display data set in accordance with increase / decrease of the start memory number or occurrence of an overflow prize (step B531). Then, if there is the hold number display data (step B532; Yes), it is checked whether there is display delay information in any of the hold storage areas of the start-up memory currently stored (step B701). If there is no display delay information (step B702; No), a normal hold display setting process (step B704) is performed, and the hold display process is terminated. By this process, the normal start memory display 41b is set as the start memory number increases or decreases.

  If there is display delay information (step B702; Yes), a hold display delay setting process (step B703) is performed, and the hold display process ends. In this case, the display is set according to the state of the start memory. For example, at the time of the occurrence of the start memory triggered by the display delay of the start memory display 41b, a setting for displaying a notification indicating the number of winnings as shown in FIG. 122 (a) is performed. Further, when the start memory is generated while the display of the start memory display 41b is being delayed, the start memory display 41b for the start memory is displayed. In this case, since there is a start memory that performs display delay, the number of start memory displays 41b is one less than the actual start memory number. It should be noted that the start memory display 41b is displayed in the same manner when an overflow prize is generated.

  On the other hand, when there is no hold number display data (step B532; No), hold switch setting processing (step B705) is performed, and the hold display processing is ended. In the hold switching setting process (step B705), the processes after step B533 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 98 are performed. As a result, the display as shown in FIG. 122 is performed.

  In the above description, the case where the display of the start memory display 41b is subject to delay is the case where the start memory that has a special result as the first or third hold of the first start memory has occurred. Any start memory of the start memory and the second start memory may be set as a delay target of the start memory display 41b. Further, the predetermined notification condition is that a predetermined number of winnings occur during the period from the occurrence of the start memory to be delayed to the stop timing of the identification information in the next special figure variation display game. It is not a thing. For example, a predetermined notification condition may be that a predetermined number of winnings occur during the period until the end of the special figure variation display game in which the start memory subject to delay occurs, or the occurrence of the start memory subject to delay occurs. The predetermined notification condition may be that a predetermined number of winnings occur during a period from a predetermined number of special figure change display games to the end of the game. The period for monitoring the occurrence of the predetermined number of winnings is set to the stop timing of the identification information corresponding to the position where the start memory display 41b whose display is delayed is displayed. As a result, the prefetching result may be notified by a predetermined operation of the central identification information.

  In addition, the start memory that is subject to delay in the display of the start memory display 41b may be other than the start memory that results in a special result. For example, the start memory that results in a specific reach state when the result is out of place, or the start memory that is out of result. A starting memory arbitrarily selected from the memory may be used. Also, as a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, a unit variation display that stops after a plurality of identification information is varied and displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the special figure variation display game is performed twice or more times to derive a result mode. When the start-up memory that becomes the special result mode occurs when the pseudo-variation mode to be selected is selected, the display of the start-up memory display 41b may be delayed. In this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 122 (f) to 122 (h) may be performed in the unit variation display after the predetermined number of winnings are generated and the confirmation notification condition is satisfied.

  From the above, the start memory display control means (production control device 300) displays the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory determined that the special result is derived by the prior result determination means (game control device 100). A pre-reading effect that can be displayed and displays the start memory display 41b that is not displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition and suggests the determination result of the prior result determination means in the start memory display 41b. Can be executed.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth modification of the fourth embodiment is described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is designed to produce an effect according to a predetermined operation of the start memory display 41b.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the pre-reading effect is performed by the start memory display 41b moving up and down instead of the identification information moving up and down. FIG. 129 shows a display example in the case of performing a pre-reading effect on the first hold of the first start-up memory. After the left identification information is stopped as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the start memory display 41b is moved upward toward the identification information as shown in FIG. 129 (b). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (c), the start memory display 41b moves to the back side of the identification information and is concealed, and returns to the original position as shown in FIG. 129 (d). At this time, a pre-reading effect (in this case, a display of “!!”) is performed on the start memory display 41b.

  By performing such a pre-reading effect by the operation of the start memory display 41b, an unprecedented start start memory display 41b can be performed and a sense of expectation can be continued. In addition, it is possible to relate the change of the start memory display 41b to the operation of the identification information. For example, even if the identification information is stopped because the result is not reached and the result is out of reach, the expectation is given. Can increase the interest of the game.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), a variable display device (special display) that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. In the gaming machine having the display 51, the special display 2 52, and the display device 41) and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result A start winning memory means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as an execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area, and a start winning memory The means includes a preliminary result determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number stored as the start memory before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, and stores it in the start winning storage means Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for controlling the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory, and the start memory display control means determines that the determination result of the start memory by the prior result determination means is a specific determination. If it is a result, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory as the specific determination result is moved to the back side of the predetermined identification information stopped and displayed in the variable display game, and then returned to the original position. A specific determination result can be notified on the start memory display 41b which is displayed and returned to the original position.

  In addition, as a variation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, a revariation mode in which a part or all of a plurality of identification information is fluctuated for a predetermined time and temporarily displayed after the special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and then the fluctuation pattern is displayed again. May be selected, and a notification regarding the re-variation mode may be performed by the start memory display 41b.

  FIG. 130 shows a display example when the identification information on the right side changes again. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), when the third hold occurs as shown in FIG. 130 (b) during the execution of the special figure change display game that becomes the re-change state, the re-change state is displayed in the start memory display 41b. Is displayed (here, “R” is displayed). However, at this point, the player recognizes that this is a pre-reading advance notice for the newly generated third hold, and the sense of expectation for the currently changing special figure changing display game will be lost. However, after that, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), after the right-side identification information is temporarily stopped, the start storage display 41b corresponding to the third hold moves upward toward the right-side identification information. And is returned to the original position as shown in FIG. 130 (e). At this time, the display indicating the re-variation mode displayed on the start memory display 41b is finished. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (f), the identification information on the right side starts to be displayed again and stops as shown in FIG. 130 (g). As a result, the expectation for the currently changing special figure variation display game once attenuated is improved again.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (h), the right-side identification information that has been stopped is moved up and down to conceal the start-up storage display 41b corresponding to the third hold, and a pre-reading effect as shown in FIG. 130 (i). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 130 (e), a pre-reading effect may be performed when the start memory display 41b returns to the original position. If it does in this way, the start of a re-variable display can be alert | reported by the operation | movement similar to the operation | movement in the case of performing a prefetch effect, and the interest of a game can be raised. In particular, the third hold changes from the player's recognition as a pre-reading notice to a sense of expectation for the currently changing special figure display game, and then leads to the actual third pre-reading notice. Therefore, the player's expectation can be continued effectively, and the interest of the game is further improved. Furthermore, although it is assumed that the re-variation display is notified by the identification information to be displayed again and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the top and bottom, the re-variation display is notified by any start memory display 41b, and the start memory display 41b is displayed. You may make it move to the identification information which carries out a variable display again.

  As described above, the game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) that performs execution control of the variable display game is provided, and the game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) has a plurality of pieces of identification information during execution of the variable display game. It is possible to select and execute a re-variation mode in which a part or all of the image is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined time and displayed in a temporary stop state, and then displayed again in a fluctuating manner. When selected, the start memory display 41b is displayed for notifying that it will be in a re-variation mode, and when the identification information is displayed again and again, predetermined start information is displayed on the start memory display 41b temporarily. It is possible to notify that the identification information is variably displayed again by performing a display to return to the original position after being moved to the back side.

  In the re-variable display shown in FIG. 130, only a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information is variably displayed again. However, all the identification information may be variably displayed again after being temporarily stopped. . In other words, as a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, a unit variation display that stops after a plurality of identification information is varied and displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the special figure variation display game is performed two or more times to derive a result mode. The pseudo-variation mode to be selected can be selected, and when the unit variation display is performed, the re-variation display notification by the start storage display 41b as shown in FIG. 130 may be performed. In this case, a display may be made to notify that the variable display is performed again on all the identification information and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the upper and lower sides, or the partial display is performed again on a part of the identification information. You may make it perform the display which alert | reports.

  In other words, the game execution control means (game control device 100) normally performs unit variation display that stops after a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed for a predetermined time during the execution of the variation display game, and derives a result mode. The variation mode and the pseudo variation mode in which the unit variation display is performed two or more times and the result mode is derived during execution of the variation display game is selected and executed. The start memory display control means (production control device 300) is a predetermined start memory display 41b that is stopped and displayed in the variable display game at the start of a plurality of unit variation displays executed in the pseudo-continuous variation mode. It is also possible to perform a display to return to the original position after moving to the back side of the identification information.

  Note that the configurations of the fourth embodiment and the modified examples of the fourth embodiment can be applied in appropriate combination. Furthermore, the configurations of the first to third embodiments and the modifications of the first to third embodiments can be applied in appropriate combinations. In this case, if there is a conflicting process, the process may be distributed depending on conditions or arbitrarily.

  Next, a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs a pre-reading effect on the start-up memory in the special gaming state.

  FIG. 131 shows a display example on the display device 41 in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), when a predetermined round (10 rounds in this case) in the special gaming state is reached, a display indicating that an effect of informing whether or not a high probability state is to be performed is performed, and the next round Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), an effect in which the teammate character 41r and the enemy character 41s fight is performed. This effect is an effect in which it is notified that the teammate character 41r wins and the high game state is entered after the special game state is over.

  In the next round, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), the result of the battle between the teammate character 41r and the enemy character 41s is displayed. Here, it is informed that the teammate character 41r has won and enters a high-probability state after the end of the special gaming state. If it is informed that the teammate character 41r wins and becomes in a high probability state, the teammate character 41r breaks the start memory display 41b in the next round as shown in FIG. 131 (d), and FIG. 131 (e). As shown in FIG. 2, a pre-reading effect (here, “!!!!” is displayed) is performed. When the enemy character 41s wins, no pre-reading effect is performed.

  FIG. 132 shows another example of display on the display device 41 in the special game state. The example shown in FIG. 132 differs from the example shown in FIG. 131 in the types of items that the teammate character 41r has. As shown in FIG. 133, there are a plurality of types of items, and the possibility of a high probability state varies depending on the type of the selected item. In FIG. 133, it is notified that the possibility of becoming a high probability state is higher as it goes down. Moreover, the possibility that a pre-reading effect is performed with more start-up memory displays 41b is higher for items that notify that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state.

  When the teammate character 41r wins as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the start memory display 41b is destroyed and a pre-reading effect is performed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), one start memory display 41b is first destroyed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), all the start memory displays 41b are broken. In this case, only one start memory display 41b may be destroyed. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (e), a prefetch effect is performed on the start memory display 41b.

  In this way, by performing the pre-reading effect only when it becomes a high probability state, it comes to have a sense of expectation for both the notification of the high probability state and the pre-reading effect following this notification, It is possible to enhance the interest during the special game state. Moreover, since it becomes easy to perform the prefetching effect which alert | reports that it will become a special result if it will be in a high probability state, the interest of a prefetching effect can be raised. In addition, since the pre-reading effect is performed at a timing close to the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to perform the pre-reading effect with a large number of start memories.

  FIG. 134 shows the types of special results in the gaming machine of this embodiment. There are four types of special results: high probability A, B, and low probability A, B. In any case, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 15 rounds. When the probability is high A or low probability A, the promotion effect as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 is not performed, and the pre-reading effect is not performed. When the probability is high B, the promotion effect and the prefetch effect are performed from the 10th round to the 13th round. When the probability is low B, the promotion effect is performed from the 10th round to the 12th round, but the prefetching effect is not performed.

[In-round processing]
In order to perform the display as described above, the effect control apparatus 300 performs the process shown in FIG. 135 in the mid-round process (step B73) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this in-round processing, first, it is determined whether there is an effect request flag (step B711). If there is an effect request flag (step B711; Yes), information is reset by jackpot (step B712). The number is updated and set (step B713).

  Then, information on the reset jackpot is acquired (step B714), and it is checked whether the special promotion effect execution jackpot (step B715). The special promotion effect is an effect as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, and the big hit for executing this special promotion effect is a high probability B and a low probability B. If this special promotion effect execution big hit is not (step B716; No), the corresponding normal round video pattern is set (step B721), the effect request flag is cleared (step B722), and the in-round processing is performed. finish. If it is a special promotion effect execution big hit (step B716; Yes), the number of updated rounds is acquired (step B717), and it is checked whether it is a special promotion effect execution round (step B718).

  If it is not the special promotion effect execution round (step B719; No), the corresponding normal round video pattern is set (step B721), the effect request flag is cleared (step B722), and the in-round processing is terminated. To do. If it is a special promotion effect execution round (step B719; Yes), a special promotion effect information setting process is performed (step B720), the effect request flag is cleared (step B722), and the in-round process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no effect request flag (step B711; No), it is determined whether the value of the update timer is 0 (step B723), and when it is not 0 (step B724; No), the in-round processing is terminated. If it is 0 (step B724; Yes), the end of the round is set (step B724), and the in-round processing is ended.

[Special promotion effect information setting process]
FIG. 136 shows the special promotion effect information setting process (step B720) in the above-described round process. In this special promotion effect information setting process, first, an effect stage based on the number of rounds is set (step B731), and a branch process according to the effect stage is performed (step B732).

  When the effect stage is the effect start stage (in the case of 10 rounds), the image pattern setting process (step B733) is performed during the effect start round, and the special promotion effect information setting process is terminated. Further, when the effect stage is the promotion effect stage (in the case of 11 rounds), the promotion effect round video pattern setting process (step B734) is performed, and the special promotion effect information setting process is terminated.

  Further, when the effect stage is the promotion determination stage (when it is 12 rounds), the video pattern setting process (step B735) during the promotion determination effect round is performed, and the special promotion effect information setting process is terminated. When the stage of production is the specific prefetch stage of production (when it is 13 rounds), the video pattern setting process (step B736) is performed during the specific prefetch stage of production round, and the special promotion production information setting process is terminated. Note that the video pattern setting process (step B736) during the specific prefetch effect round is executed only when the special result has a high probability B.

[Image pattern setting process during the production start round]
FIG. 137 shows an effect start round video pattern setting process (step B733) in the special promotion effect information setting process described above. In the effect start round video pattern setting process, the effect information of the effect start round is acquired (step B741), the video pattern corresponding to the effect information is set (step B742), and the effect start round video pattern setting process is performed. finish. By this process, as shown in FIG. 131A, an image for informing whether or not a high probability state is set is set.

[Image pattern setting process during promotion round]
FIG. 138 shows a promotion effect round video pattern setting process (step B734) in the above-described special promotion effect information setting process. In the promotion effect round video pattern setting process, the effect information of the promotion effect round is acquired (step B751), and the information based on the jackpot is acquired (step B752). Thereafter, the corresponding production information is set based on the information of the big hit (step B753), the video pattern corresponding to the production information is set (step B754), and the video pattern setting process during the promotion production round is finished. By this process, as shown in FIG. 131 (b) and FIG. 132 (a), the item of the teammate character 41r is determined, and an image corresponding to the content of the battle based on the type of special result is set.

[Video pattern setting processing during promotion decision production round]
FIG. 139 shows the video pattern setting process (step B735) during the promotion determination effect round in the special promotion effect information setting process described above. In the promotion determination effect round video pattern setting process, the effect information of the promotion determination effect round is acquired (step B761), and the information based on the jackpot is acquired (step B762). Thereafter, the determined effect information corresponding to the jackpot information is set (step B763), the video pattern corresponding to the determined effect information is set (step B764), and the video pattern setting process during the promotion determined effect round is terminated. By this processing, as shown in FIG. 131 (c) and FIG. 132 (b), an image in which any character wins according to the type of special result is set.

[Video pattern setting process during specific pre-reading production round]
FIG. 140 shows the video pattern setting process (step B736) during the specific prefetch effect round in the special promotion effect information setting process described above. In the video pattern setting process during the specific pre-reading effect round, the effect information of the specific pre-reading effect round is acquired (step B771), and the information based on the jackpot is acquired (step B772). Thereafter, information on the reserved storage area is acquired (step B773), and corresponding specific prefetch effect information is set based on the information on the jackpot and the information on the reserved storage area (step B774). Then, a video pattern corresponding to the specific prefetch effect information is set (step B775), and the video pattern setting process during the specific prefetch effect round is ended. With this process, as shown in FIGS. 131 (d) and 131 (e) and FIGS. 132 (c) to (e), the start memory display 41b for performing the prefetch effect is determined, and the content of the prefetch effect is determined. .

  From the above, the start memory display control means (effect control device 300) performs the prefetch effect that suggests the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100) in the start memory display 41b according to the progress of the special game state. It will be executable. Further, the start memory display control means can execute the prefetch effect only when the high probability state is entered after the special gaming state is finished. In addition, the production control device 300 can notify the high possibility of becoming a high probability state in the special gaming state, and is subject to a prefetch effect according to the notification of the high possibility of becoming the high probability state. The number of starting memories is determined.

  In addition, in the process of setting the corresponding specific prefetch effect information based on the information of the big hit and the information of the reserved storage area (step B774), it is possible to set the prefetch effect in consideration of the probability state after the end of the special game state. You may do it. For example, in the special figure hold information determination process (step A222) in the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 10, whether or not a special result is obtained in both the determination value in the high probability state and the determination value in the normal probability state Make a decision. In this way, regardless of the probability state when the start memory is generated, a prefetch effect based on the prefetch result according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state can be performed.

  In addition, the pre-reading effect is performed only when the high probability state is reached after the special gaming state ends, but the pre-reading effect may be performed even when the normal gaming state is reached after the special gaming state ends. FIG. 141 shows an example of the pre-reading effect when the normal probability state is entered after the special gaming state is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (a), an effect is provided to notify whether or not the game is in a predetermined round in a special game state and a high probability state is reached. As shown in FIG. 141 (c), the teammate character 41r loses. When it is informed that the high probability state is not established, the enemy character 41s destroys the start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. In the pre-reading effect in this case, as shown in FIG. 141 (e), an effect that clearly informs that the result is not an effect that suggests the possibility of a special result is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 141, the enemy character 41s is also provided with an item, and the possibility of a high probability state is suggested from the relationship with the item of the teammate character 41r.

  In addition, the item shown in FIG. 133 is more likely to be prefetched with more start-up memory displays 41b as the item notifies that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state. You may make it set the number of starting memory | storages which performs the high possibility of becoming a high probability state every time, and a prefetch effect. For example, it is possible to set various items such as an item with a high start memory number that has a low probability of being in a high probability state and an item with a large start memory number that has a high probability of being in a high probability state but a low start memory number that has a pre-read effect It is.

  Further, when the second start memory is digested with priority over the first start memory, and the pre-read effect for the first start memory cannot be performed, the effect of whether or not the high probability state is set. You may do it only.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the special figure variation display game that is the predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as the specific variation pattern, and the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game has not yet occurred. In a state where there is no information, a prior notification indicating information related to the start-up memory is performed. The gaming machine of this embodiment also has this configuration, but it is also possible to omit this prior notification configuration and use the configuration of this embodiment alone. In addition, the configuration of the fifth embodiment described above, the configurations of the first to fourth embodiments, and the modifications of the first to fourth embodiments can be applied in appropriate combinations. In this case, if there is a conflicting process, the process may be distributed depending on conditions or arbitrarily.

  Next, a gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs an effect of operating the start memory display 41b so as to notify the advance notice of the prefetched result and the result of the special figure variation display game.

  FIG. 142 shows an example of a pre-read result notice and a notice of the special figure variation display game result by the effect of operating the start memory display 41b in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 143 shows a time chart in this case.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the start memory c is generated from the state where there are two start memories a and b (t21 in FIG. 143), and as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the start memories a, b, c When there are three, one of the conditions for performing the effect is established. In this way, when the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number, it is conceivable that the start memory can be generated by making it possible to execute the effect, stimulating the player's motivation for the effect execution, The operating rate of the machine can be increased. In addition, since the effect is executed over the three special figure change display games based on the three start memories, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the time for executing the effect. In addition, in the start memory at this time, the effect is performed when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the two start memories a and b that are digested first is out of order and is not in a predetermined variation mode. This prevents the production from becoming redundant.

  In this effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the special figure variation display game in which the effect start condition is satisfied, the start memory display 41b is specified as the introduction effect from the normal display mode (round display). Change to mode (character display). Further, the display area of the variable display area 80 is reduced, and the display area of the start storage display area 41a is enlarged. Thereby, it is notified that the production is started (from t22 to t23 in FIG. 143). By expanding the display area of the start memory display area 41a, the player can easily recognize that it is a special effect using the start memory display 41b, which is different from a state where the number of start memories is simply informed. The production effect increases. In particular, when an effect is performed by relating all of the start memory displays 41b, a dynamic movement or the like is possible by expanding the area, and the range of the effect is expanded.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory a is started (t23 in FIG. 143), the fluctuation display area 80 is the first fluctuation area in order from the left. 81, the second variable region 82, and the third variable region 83 are divided into three variable regions, and the variation display of the identification information is started in each variable region. In this effect, each variable area of the variable display area 80 has a one-to-one correspondence with each start memory display 41b displayed immediately below, and the change mode of the corresponding variable area changes with the operation of the start memory display 41b. It is supposed to be. This makes it easy to understand the relationship between the operation of the start memory display 41b and the change in the variation mode of the identification information, and enjoys how it affects the variation mode of the identification information that plays an important role in notifying the special result. A novel notice that you can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the special figure variation display game based on the start memory a is started, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a is still displayed. A display simulating a hammer is displayed above the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a, and a display prompting the player to press the effect button 25 is displayed. When the player depresses the effect button 25, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a is operated so as to be pushed downward by the hammer. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), the change display of the corresponding first change area 81 is stopped (t24 in FIG. 143), and the special figure change display game based on the start memory a is ended (t25 in FIG. 143). ).

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 142 (f), when the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory b is started (t25 in FIG. 143), the corresponding start memory display 41b remains displayed. In this state, a display simulating a hammer is displayed above the start memory display 41b, and a display prompting the player to press the effect button 25 is displayed. When the player depresses the effect button 25, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b is operated to be pushed downward by the hammer. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 142 (g), the change display in the corresponding second change area 82 is stopped (t26 in FIG. 143), and the special figure change display game based on the start memory b is ended (t27 in FIG. 143). ).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 142 (g), if the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b is successfully pushed down, the stop mode in the second fluctuation region 82 is the first stop that has been stopped first. The stop mode is the same as the stop mode of the 1 fluctuation region 81. This state is a reach state for production that indicates that if the third variation region 83 to be stopped next becomes the same stop mode, it will be a big hit. Thereby, it is notified that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory c is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, if the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b fails to be pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 142 (f), the stop mode in the second fluctuation region 82 is stopped first. The stop mode is different from the stop mode of the one change area 81, and it is notified that the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory c is not likely to be a big hit at this time. In this case, when the stop mode of the third variable region 83 is derived, a resurgence (re-stop) effect in which the stop mode of the second variable region 82 changes to the same stop mode as the stop mode of the first variable region 81 is provided. It is possible to execute the program so that the expectation can be maintained until the end.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (h), when the special figure variation display game based on the third start memory c is started (t27 in FIG. 143), the corresponding start memory display 41b is still displayed. In this state, a display imitating a hammer is displayed above the start memory display 41b, and a display prompting the player to press the effect button 25 is displayed. When the player depresses the effect button 25, if the result is a big hit, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c is operated to be pushed downward by the hammer. Accordingly, the change display in the corresponding third change region 83 stops in the same stop mode as the stop mode of the first change region 81 and the second change region 82 (t28 in FIG. 143). Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (i), a result notification effect is performed to notify that the result is a big hit (from t28 to t29 in FIG. 143), and the special figure variation display game based on the start memory c is ended. The special game state is started (t30 in FIG. 143).

  On the other hand, if the result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 142 (j), it fails to push the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c downward, and the stop mode in the third fluctuation region 83 stops first. The stop mode is different from the stop mode of the first change area 81 and the second change area 82, and a result notification effect indicating that the first change area 81 and the second change area 82 are out of place is performed, and then the effect ends as shown in FIG. 142 (k).

  In this way, the special drawing fluctuation display game that is executed based on the special figure fluctuation display game or the running memory that is executed by executing the predetermined effect including operating the start memory display 41b controlled in the specific display mode. By notifying information related to the stop result, it is possible to make a novel advance notice. That is, since the predetermined effect related to the notification of the game result is performed using the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode as a result of the prefetching, the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode is operated. Information related to the stop result of the special figure variation display game executed based on the other start memory by the effect in the start memory display area 41a and the operation of the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode is notified. It is possible to make a novel notice. Moreover, it is novel not only to perform a pre-reading effect but also to produce an effect when controlled to a specific display mode, and in particular, the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode is operated. It is possible to have fun in what kind of operation is performed after the display mode is achieved.

  In addition, although all the start memory displays 41b are changed to the specific display mode, some start memory displays 41b may be changed to the specific display mode. In this case, the start memory display 41b in the normal display mode is also operated in the same manner as the start memory display 41b in the specific display mode to produce an effect. Thereby, for example, when the possibility of a big hit is high, all the start memory displays 41b change to a specific display mode, and when the possibility of a big hit is low, only a part of the start memory displays 41b is a specific display mode. It is possible to produce an effect that changes. In addition to this, the start memory display 41b in the normal display mode may be likely to fail to be pushed downward, and the presentation contents may be suggested by the display mode of the start memory display 41b.

  Even in such a case, since all the start memory displays 41b are associated with each other, the effect is executed. Therefore, even if there is a start memory display 41b that is not controlled by the specific display mode, the display is controlled to the specific display mode when the effect starts. The start memory display 41b that is not performed also contributes to the production, and all the start memory displays 41b can have a sense of expectation. Conversely, if all the start memory displays 41b are controlled to the specific display mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectation at the start of the performance.

  Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the effect start condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. 142 (c), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, the introduction effect and the start memory display 41b are operated. You may make it not perform the effect to make. Further, the introduction effect may be changed to an effect that suggests and notifies that the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result. Further, in the special figure variation display game, an effect of operating the start memory display 41b as shown in FIGS. 142 (d) to (i) may be performed.

[Hold count command reception processing]
In order to perform such an effect, the effect control device 300 performs a hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 144 instead of the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. In the hold number command reception process, after the process related to the increase / decrease of the start memory (steps B81 to B92), it is determined whether there is a hold fluctuation executable flag (step B781).

  The hold variation is an effect including operating the start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. 142, and the hold variation executable flag is a flag set during the execution of the hold variation. If there is this pending fluctuation executable flag (step B781; Yes), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If there is no hold variation executable flag (step B781; No), the number of holds (starting storage number) is checked (step B782), and it is determined whether the predetermined number has been reached (step B783).

  In determining whether the predetermined number has been reached, it is determined whether the number of holds has reached a specific number that is one of the conditions for executing the hold fluctuation. Here, the predetermined number (specific number) is 3, and the case where the predetermined number is reached means that the number of holdings is reduced to 3 while the number of holdings is not increased and the number of holdings is not changed. Including the case where If the hold number has not reached the predetermined number (step B783; No), the hold number command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, when the hold number reaches the predetermined number (step B783; Yes), the hold fluctuation execution determination flag is set (step B784), and the hold number command reception process is terminated. In addition, although it does not perform about the process (step B93 to 100 of FIG. 28) regarding prior notification which is a structure of 1st Embodiment, after performing the process regarding this prior notification, there exists a pending | holding fluctuation executable flag. It may be determined (step B781).

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. 27, the process shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B791), and if not received (step B791; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B791; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B792), and it is checked whether there is a hold variation execution determination flag (step B793).

  If there is no pending fluctuation execution determination flag (step B794; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If there is a hold fluctuation execution determination flag (step B794; Yes), the hold fluctuation execution determination flag is cleared (step B795), and all the hold until the predetermined number of arrival hold (here, 1 to 3 is digested). Pre-read information is acquired (step B796). Then, the pre-read information of the predecessor hold (here, the hold that is digested first and second) of the predetermined number arrival hold is confirmed (step B797).

  If there is a big hit in the predecessor hold of the predetermined number arrival hold (step B798; Yes), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. In this case, since the hold fluctuation ends in the middle, the hold fluctuation is not performed. In addition, when there is no big hit in the predecessor hold of the predetermined number arrival hold (step B798; No), it is determined whether the predecessor hold of the predetermined number arrival hold has a predetermined fluctuation mode (step B799).

  The predetermined variation mode is a variation mode having a long variation time, for example, a reach state. If there is such a hold that becomes the predetermined variation mode (step B799; Yes), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. In this case, since the hold fluctuation becomes redundant, the hold fluctuation is not performed. Further, when there is no hold that becomes a predetermined fluctuation mode (step B799; No), that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game based on the advance hold does not derive a special result and the fluctuation display time is equal to or less than the predetermined time. Then, a holding variation execution lottery is performed (step B800).

  In the hold variation execution lottery, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the hold variation is performed. In this case, when the predetermined number of arrival reservations is a big hit hold, the probability of executing the hold fluctuation is made higher than when the predetermined number arrival hold is a loss. Thereby, a sense of expectation can be given to the execution of the hold fluctuation. Then, as a result of the lottery, when the hold variation is not executed (step B801; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. Further, when executing the hold fluctuation (step B801; Yes), the hold change executable flag is set (step B802), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated.

  In addition, the production control device 300 performs a process of performing the introduction production based on the set of the hold variation executable flag. In the process of performing the introduction effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), a change from the normal display mode of the start memory display 41b to the specific display mode, a process of expanding the start memory display area 41a, and the like are performed. That is, the presentation control device 300 differs from the normal display mode in the display mode of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory in relation to the determination result of the prior result determination means (game control device 100) for the start memory. Display mode control means that can control the specific display mode. Further, the production control device 300 serves as a startup storage display area expansion unit that enlarges the startup storage display area 41a more than usual when a predetermined production is executed by the information notification unit (production control device 300).

[Fluctuation processing]
In addition, the changing process shown in FIG. 146 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In this changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B121). If there is an effect request flag (step B121; Yes), PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is obtained. Clear (step B122). Thereafter, the movable body request set process is performed (step B123), and it is checked whether there is a pending fluctuation executable flag (step B811). And when there is no pending | holding fluctuation | variation executable flag (step B812; No), the process below a fluctuation pattern information setting process (step B124) is performed.

  On the other hand, if there is a pending fluctuation execution feasible flag (step B812; Yes), the pending fluctuation execution fluctuation pattern table is selected (step B813), and the processing after the fluctuation pattern information setting process (step B124) is performed. By these processes, a variation pattern for performing a variation of change in consideration of the prefetching result and scene data including the variation of reservation are set. By playing the game according to the variation pattern and scene data set here, as shown in FIG. 142, the variation display region 80 is divided, and the variation display and stop of the identification information in each variation region are started, and the specific display mode is started. The operation of the storage display 41b and the change of the change mode of the change display area 80 accompanying the operation are performed.

  Further, after the next scene data is set (step B131), it is determined whether it is the hold fluctuation end timing (step B814). The hold variation end timing is the timing at which the result notification effect as shown in FIG. 142 (i) ends, and is the end timing of the special figure change display game based on the predetermined number of arrival hold. If it is not the pending change end timing (step B814; No), the changing process is ended. If it is the pending fluctuation end timing (step B814; Yes), the pending fluctuation end is set (step B815), the pending fluctuation executable flag is cleared (step B816), and the changing process ends. As a result, the hold variation ends. In addition, although it is made not to perform about the process (step B132 to 134 of FIG. 30) regarding the prior notification which is the structure of 1st Embodiment, you may make it perform the process regarding this prior notification at the end of the process during fluctuation. good.

  That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a display control means for controlling the display contents displayed on the variable display device (display device 41). In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a predetermined effect including operating the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode, and the currently displayed variable display game or the start winning memory means (game control device 100). Information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on the stored start memory is provided. In addition, the production control device 300 divides the variable display area into a plurality of areas, and serves as identification information fluctuation control means for variably displaying the identification information in each of the plurality of areas.

  FIG. 147 shows another example of the hold fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), after the number of starting memories becomes three in this pending variation, all are changed to the specific variation mode of the same type. In the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory a, only the first change area 81 corresponding to the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a is displayed in a variable manner. When the player depresses the effect button 25, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a is pushed out toward the corresponding first variation area 81 by the hammer as shown in FIG. The game stops at the first fluctuation area 81 and the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory a ends.

  Thereafter, in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the second start memory b, only the second change area 82 corresponding to the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b is displayed in a variable manner. When the player depresses the effect button 25, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b is pushed toward the corresponding second variation area 82 by the hammer as shown in FIG. The game stops at the second fluctuation area 82, and the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory b ends.

  In this example, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b stops in the second fluctuation area 82, and then stops in the same stop manner as the first fluctuation area 81 that has stopped first. If the third variation region 83 is in the same stop mode, it is a reach state on the stage indicating that it will be a big hit. Thereby, it is notified that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory c is likely to be a big hit. However, when the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b does not stop in the second fluctuation area 82, for example, when it has passed through the second fluctuation area 82 or when it has not reached the second fluctuation area 82, Other identification information (here, numbers) will be stopped. As a result, the stop mode in the second variable region 82 is different from the stop mode of the first variable region 81 that has been stopped first. At this time, the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory c is a big hit. It is notified that there is a low possibility of becoming. In this case, when the start memory display 41b is pushed toward the third fluctuation region 83, the stop mode of the second fluctuation region 82 changes to the same stop mode as that of the first fluctuation region 81 (re-stop) ) The production may be executed so that the expectation can be maintained until the end.

  Thereafter, in the special figure variation display game based on the third start memory c, only the third change area 83 corresponding to the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c is displayed in a variable manner. When the player depresses the effect button 25, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c is pushed out toward the corresponding third variation area 93 by the hammer as shown in FIG. 147 (d). If the result is a big hit, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c stops in the third fluctuation area 83 as identification information, and the fluctuation display in the third fluctuation area 83 is the first fluctuation area 81 and the second fluctuation area 82. The stop mode is the same as the stop mode. Then, a result notification effect for notifying that the result is a big hit is performed, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory c is finished, and the special game state is started.

  Further, if the result is out of place, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c does not stop in the third fluctuation area 83, and the stop mode in the third fluctuation area 83 is stopped first. Then, the stop mode is different from the stop mode of the second change area 82, and a result notification effect indicating that it is out of play is performed, and the special figure change display game based on the start memory c is ended.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 147 (e) and (f), the type of specific display mode suggests a high possibility of winning a big hit, and from the specific display mode of FIG. 147 (e). 147 (a) is more likely to be a big hit, and the specific display mode of FIG. 147 (f) may be a big hit than the specific display mode of FIG. 147 (a). Suggests high.

  By making such an effect, it is possible to perform a novel notice that the start memory display 41b and the special figure variation display game relate to each other, and the operation of the start memory display 41b is a special result. It is possible to produce a novel effect that affects the notification. Further, if the result is a special result, it is possible to produce an effect that the identification information in all the divided areas of the variable display area 80 becomes a specific display aspect of the same aspect, such as a variable display game using the start memory display 41b. It is possible to make a novel notice of performing.

  Furthermore, since all the start memory displays 41b are controlled to the specific display mode according to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the player's expectation can be increased at the start of the production, and the possibility of a big hit depending on the type Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be further increased. Further, the specific number that is the predetermined condition is the number of divided areas of the variable display area 80, and the start memory display 41b and the variable display area 80 are divided in order to perform the production in association with all the start memory displays 41b. It is possible to correspond one-on-one with the performed areas, and it is possible to make the production easy to understand.

  FIG. 148 also shows another example of the hold fluctuation. In this hold variation, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the number of start memories is changed to a specific variation mode with three, and the player can use the effect button in the special view variation display game based on the first start memory a. When 25 is pressed, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory a is pushed toward the corresponding first variation area 81 by the hammer as shown in FIG. 148 (b) and collides with the identification information. Here, it collides with “6” of the identification information, and as shown in FIG. 148 (c), the identification information that has collided is variably displayed in a deleted state.

  Similarly, by such an operation of the start memory display 41b, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory b in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory b erases the identification information of the second variation area 82, and the start memory c The start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory c in the special figure variation display game based on this deletes the identification information of the third variation area 83. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), if the result is a big hit, the variation display of the identification information is stopped with the special result.

  Note that the number of pieces of identification information to be erased by the collision of the start memory display 41b can be set to an arbitrary number as long as one or more pieces of identification information remain. For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), if there is only one piece of identification information (here, 7) in the first variable region 81 and the second variable region 82, it will be a reach state for production and may be a big hit. You can report that it is expensive. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), it is determined that if only one piece of identification information (here, 7) is obtained in the first fluctuation area 81, the second fluctuation area 82, and the third fluctuation area 83, it will be a big hit. Can be notified.

  Note that the predetermined effect (holding fluctuation) is not limited to the above-described one, and may be used to suggest and notify the result of the special figure fluctuation display game by operating the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode. That's fine. In addition, the information related to the stop result of the variable display game to be notified by the predetermined effect (holding change) includes the stop result itself (decision information of the big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number) and the process until the stop result is derived ( (Variation pattern random number determination information) and the like. Further, the change of the variation mode of the identification information in accordance with the operation of the start memory display 41b is not limited to the above-described one, but the variation of the identification information is stopped, the variation speed is changed, or the temporary stop is performed. Anything may be used, such as re-changing the data, changing the type of identification information, changing the direction of change, or changing the number of change lines.

  In addition, the normal display mode may be anything as long as it does not give the player a special expectation, and the specific display mode may be different from the normal display mode as long as it gives the player a sense of expectation. , Things that change the size, things that change the shape, things that blink. Further, the operation of the start memory display 41b is not limited to the above-described one, but the display position is changed, the start memory display 41b is variably displayed as in the variable display game, and only the contents of the start memory display 41b are displayed. Anything that works (if ◎, only the small circle inside moves and only ○ remains) can be used.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display device that can execute a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner (see Fig. 1 display) 51, a special figure 2 display 52, and a display device 41), and a game machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of stopping the variable display game is a predetermined special result. Starting winning storage means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area; Start memory display control means for displaying the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory stored in the start winning memory means on the variable display device, and (effect control device 300) as start memory in the start prize memory means. Prior result determination means (game control device 100) for determining the stored random number before the variable display game based on the start-up memory is executed, and a display for controlling display contents displayed on the variable display device Control means (production control device 300), and the display control means normally displays the display mode of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory in relation to the determination result of the prior result determination means for the start memory. The display mode control means (production control device 300) that can be controlled to a specific display mode different from the mode, and the predetermined presentation including operating the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode are executed, Information notification means for notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on the variable display game or the start memory stored in the start winning storage means (production system) And 300), and that it comprises a.

  In addition, the information notification means (the effect control device 300) is configured to execute a predetermined effect when the start memory display 41b including the one controlled to the specific display mode becomes a specific number.

  In the display area of the variable display device (display device 41), a variable display area 80 for displaying the identification information in a variable manner and a start memory display area 41a for displaying the start memory display 41b are set, respectively, and the display control means. (Effect control device 300) is a start memory display area expansion means (effect control device 300) that expands the start memory display area 41a more than usual when a predetermined effect is executed by the information notification means (effect control device 300). It will have.

  In addition, the information notification unit (the effect control device 300) executes an effect associating all of the specific number of start memory displays 41b as the predetermined effect.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) divides the variable display area 80 into a plurality of areas (first variable area 81, second variable area 82, and third variable area 83), and identifies each of the plurality of areas. Identification information variation control means (effect control device 300) for variably displaying information is provided, and the display mode control means (effect control device 300) displays that a specific number of start memory displays 41b are displayed in the start memory display area 41a. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a are controlled to the specific display mode, and the information notification unit (the effect control device 300) performs the specific display mode as the predetermined effect. Each start storage display 41b controlled in accordance with each of the divided display areas 80 is operated corresponding to each divided area of the variable display area 80, and the identification information fluctuation control means is controlled to a specific display mode. The variation mode of the identification information in the variable display area 80 corresponding to the start memory display 41b, so that the so that change in response to the operation of the above start dynamic storage display 41b.

  Further, the predetermined condition for executing the hold variation is that the start memory corresponding to the latest start memory display 41b is determined to derive a special result by the prior result determination means (game control device 100), and the latest start memory display 41b is displayed. The preceding start memory corresponding to the preceding preceding start memory display 41b is determined not to derive a special result by the prior result determination means.

  In the display area of the variable display device (display device 41), a variable display area 80 for displaying the identification information in a variable manner and a start storage display area 41a for displaying the start storage display 41b are set, respectively, and information notification means Moves the start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode from the start memory display region 41a to the variation display region 80, and changes the variation mode of the identification information based on the movement of the start memory display 41b. It will be.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) divides the variable display area 80 into a plurality of areas (first variable area 81, second variable area 82, and third variable area 83), and identifies each of the plurality of areas. Identification information variation control means (effect control device 300) for variably displaying information is provided, and the display mode control means (effect control device 300) displays that a specific number of start memory displays 41b are displayed in the start memory display area 41a. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a are controlled to the specific display mode, and the information notification unit (the effect control device 300) performs the specific display mode as the predetermined effect. Each start storage display 41b controlled in accordance with each of the divided display areas 80 is operated corresponding to each divided area of the variable display area 80, and the identification information fluctuation control means is controlled to a specific display mode. The identification information in the variable display area 80 corresponding to the start memory display 41b, and thus can be changed to a specific display mode according to the operation of the above start dynamic storage display 41b.

  Further, the specific number is the number of regions (first variation region 81, second variation region 82, third variation region 83) into which the variation display region 80 is divided.

  In addition, the specific display mode includes a plurality of specific display modes, and the display mode control means (production control device 300) includes a predetermined number of start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a. When the condition is satisfied, all the start storage displays 41b displayed in the start storage display area 41a can be controlled to any one of the plurality of specific display forms, and the identification information variation control means (effect control) When there is a start memory that is determined to have a special result by the prior result determination means (game control device 100), the device 300) has all the divided regions of the variable display region 80 (first variable region 81, second variable region). The identification information in the fluctuation area 82 and the third fluctuation area 83) is changed to the specific display mode according to the operation of the start memory display 41b.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described sixth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of production (holding fluctuation).

  FIG. 149 shows an example of pre-notification of the pre-reading result by the effect of operating the start-up memory display 41b in the present modification and notification of the result of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 149 (a) shows a case where the number of starting memories is changed from two to three as shown in FIG. 149 (b). When there are two display modes (starting memories a and c) and one start memory display 41b (in this case, a normal display mode) having a different display mode (starting memory b), a predetermined effect is obtained. As a result, the hold fluctuation can be started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 150, the types of specific display modes include characters 1 to 3 as specific display modes for informing the pre-reading result regarding the start memory, and the specific display mode used for displaying the result of the hold fluctuation. Character 4 and an ambiguous notification mode are set. Up to the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) until the hold variation is started, the prefetch result is notified using characters 1 to 3. In addition, there are three patterns as shown in FIG. 151 in a state where there are two same specific display modes in the start memory display 41b and one start memory display 41b having a different display mode. Even so, it is possible to execute the hold fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (c), in the hold variation, the variation display is performed on the start memory display 41b (here, the start memory b) having a display mode different from the others. In this variable display, the start memory display 41b is displayed in a variable manner so as to sequentially change into a normal display mode and a plurality of types of specific display modes (characters 1 to 5 and an ambiguous notification mode), and one of these display modes after a predetermined time The change display stops at. Note that the start-up storage display area 41a may be enlarged when the hold variation is started.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (d), the start memory display 41b that has been variably displayed becomes the same display mode as the specific display mode that has already been displayed, and all of the three start memory displays 41b have the same display mode. For example, it is notified that the result of the special figure variation display game based on any start memory is a special result. In addition, as shown in FIG. 149 (e), when the display is stopped in a specific display mode that is different from the specific display mode 41b that has already been displayed, the result of the special figure variation display game based on any start-up memory is the special result. It will not be reported. In this case, it may be notified that the result of the special figure variation display game based on all start memories is out of date, or there is a possibility that a special result may be obtained simply by not notifying that the result is a special result. It is good as a thing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 149 (f), when the ambiguous notification mode is displayed, the prefetch result regarding the start-up memory is not clearly notified. In this case, it may be notified that a specific variation mode such as a specific reach or pseudo-continuous variation mode is obtained.

  By performing such a hold variation as a predetermined effect, if there is a start memory that will be a special result, the start memory display 41b will all be in the same specific display mode, and in the process of all the same specific display mode in the start memory It is possible to make a novel notice that the display 41b is operated, and an effect such as a special figure variation display game is performed on the start memory display 41b. In addition, in the process of performing an effect such as a special figure variation display game by the start memory display 41b, the start memory display 41b controlled to one specific display mode and the start memory display not controlled to the one specific display mode 41b, so that a so-called reach state is formed, and the start memory display 41b that is not controlled to one specific display mode is changed in stages, so that all the start memory displays 41b become one specific display mode. The expectation for this can be gradually increased, and a highly interesting production can be performed.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows a time chart in the case where the condition for executing the hold fluctuation is satisfied as shown in FIG. 149 (b). From the state where there are two start memories, start memories are generated and the number becomes three, and when the display mode is such that the hold fluctuation can be executed, the hold fluctuation is started (t41). This hold variation is performed in the special figure change display game being executed when the condition for executing the hold variation is satisfied (from t41 to t42). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), it becomes possible to execute the hold fluctuation (t51), but the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is short (from t51 to t52). , Do not change hold.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the control as described above, a prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 153 is performed instead of the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B791), and if not received (step B791; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B791; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B792), and prefetch display processing is performed (step B821). Although details of the prefetch display processing (step B821) will be described later, processing for selecting whether or not to change to the specific display mode and the type of the specific display mode is performed.

  Then, it is confirmed whether the hold fluctuation execution condition 1 is satisfied (step B822). In the hold variation execution condition 1, the number of start memories is three, the start memory display 41b has two identical specific display modes, and there is one start memory display 41b having a different display mode. It is that. When the hold variation execution condition 1 is not satisfied (step B823; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. When the hold fluctuation execution condition 1 is satisfied (step B823; Yes), it is confirmed whether the hold fluctuation execution condition 2 is satisfied (step B824).

  The hold fluctuation execution condition 2 is that the remaining execution time of the special figure change display game being executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined time during which the hold fluctuation can be executed. When the hold variation execution condition 2 is not satisfied (step B825; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. Further, when the hold fluctuation execution condition 2 is satisfied (step B825; Yes), the prefetch information of the hold fluctuation target hold is confirmed (step B826).

  If there is no start-up memory that is a big hit (step B827; No), a hold fluctuation failure pattern is set (step B831), a hold fluctuation execution flag is set (step B832), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated. . In this case, a hold variation that results as shown in FIGS. 149 (e) and (f) is set.

  On the other hand, if there is a start memory that is a big hit (step B827; Yes), a success pattern setting lottery is executed (step B828), and it is determined from the lottery result whether a success pattern is set (step B829). If the success pattern is not set as a result of the lottery (step B829; No), the hold fluctuation failure pattern is set (step B831), the hold fluctuation execution flag is set (step B832), and the prefetch command reception process is performed. finish. When the success pattern is set as a result of the lottery (step B829; Yes), the hold fluctuation success pattern is set (step B830), the hold fluctuation execution flag is set (step B832), and the prefetch command reception process is performed. finish. In this case, a hold variation that results as shown in FIG. 149 (d) is set.

[Pre-reading display processing]
FIG. 154 shows the prefetch display process in the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. In this pre-reading display process, first, the number of holds is confirmed (step B841). If the number of holds is 4 or more (step B842; Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the currently generated hold is a big hit (step B848).

  If the occurrence suspension is not a big hit (step B849; No), the prefetch display lottery table 1 is set (step B850), and the prefetch display lottery is executed using the set prefetch display lottery table (step B852). Further, when the occurrence suspension is a big hit (step B849; Yes), the prefetch display lottery table 2 is set (step B851), and the prefetch display lottery is executed using the set prefetch display lottery table (step B852).

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the prefetch display lottery table 2 selected when the result is a big hit, a specific display mode with a higher expectation than the prefetch display lottery table 1 selected when the result is out of place is selected. Probability is high. In addition, the probability that a specific display mode with a high expectation is selected is higher in the case of a reach with a higher expectation. Note that “no change” means that the normal display mode is maintained.

  Returning to FIG. 154, in the process of executing the pre-reading display lottery in the set pre-reading display lottery table (step B852), information on the variation mode (presence / absence and type of reach) of the special-figure display game based on the start memory generated this time. And a lottery to determine whether to perform prefetch display according to the selection rate defined in the prefetch display lottery table 1 or 2 is performed. When the pre-reading display is executed (step B853; Yes), that is, when the specific display mode (any of characters 1 to 3) is selected as a result of the lottery, the selected pre-reading display mode is set ( Step B854), the prefetch display process is terminated. Further, when the prefetch display is not executed (step B853; No), that is, when no change is selected as a result of the lottery, the prefetch display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings is not 4 or more (step B842; No), it is confirmed whether or not the predetermined number of holdings (3 in this case) has been reached in the current generation holding (step B843). If the predetermined number of holds has not been reached (step B844; No), the prefetch display state of the preceding hold is confirmed (step B845). If there is no prefetch display mode (step B846; No), the current occurrence is suspended. The process following the process for confirming whether the game is a big hit (step B848) is performed. If there is a pre-reading display mode (step B846; Yes), a predetermined number non-reaching process (step B847) is performed, and the pre-reading display lottery is executed with the pre-reading display lottery table set (step B852). Process.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in the predetermined number non-reaching process, first, it is confirmed whether the current occurrence hold or the advance hold is a big hit (step B861). If it is not a big win (step B862; No), the prefetch display lottery table 3 Is set (step B863), and the predetermined number non-reaching process is terminated. If it is a big hit (step B862; Yes), the prefetch display lottery table 4 is set (step B864), and the predetermined number non-reaching process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the pre-reading display lottery tables 3 and 4 enable selection of the pre-reading mode that has been generated this time with reference to the pre-reading mode of pre-holding. In the prefetch display lottery table 4 selected when the result is a big hit, the probability that a specific display mode having a higher expectation is selected is higher than that in the prefetch display lottery table 3 selected when the result is off. In addition, the probability that a specific display mode with a high degree of expectation is selected becomes higher when the hold generated this time becomes a reach with a high expectation degree.

  In addition, when the specific display mode is selected in any table, the probability that the same specific display mode as the specific display mode of the advance reservation is selected is high. Among these, in the pre-reading display lottery table 3 selected when the result is out of place, the probability that the same specific display mode is selected is higher in the case of SP1 reach or higher than in the case of normal reach or lower. On the other hand, in the prefetch display lottery table 4 selected when the result is a big hit, the probability that the same specific display mode is selected in the case of the normal reach or less is higher than that in the case of the SP1 reach or more. However, in the prefetch display lottery table 4 selected when the result is a big hit, the probability that the same specific display mode is selected is higher than that in the prefetch display lottery table 3 selected when the result is out of order.

  As a result, when the result is out of order, it is easy to execute the hold fluctuation when a reach with high expectation is selected, and even if the result is out of place, the player can enjoy the hold fluctuation with a sense of expectation. become able to. In addition, when the result is a big hit, the probability that SP1 reach or higher is selected is higher than the normal reach. Therefore, it is easier to execute the hold fluctuation in the case of the normal reach with the lowest expectation among the reach. Even when the reach is selected, the expectation can be enhanced toward the big hit.

  In the process of executing the pre-reading display lottery in the pre-reading display lottery table set in FIG. 154 (step B852), information on the variation mode (presence / absence or type of reach) of the special-figure display game based on the start memory generated this time. Alternatively, the pre-reading pre-reading mode is acquired, and lottery is performed to determine whether to perform pre-reading display according to the selection rate defined in the pre-reading display lottery table 3 or 4.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined number of reservations is reached (step B844; Yes), the predetermined number arrival time process (step B855) is performed, and the prefetch display process is terminated. As shown in FIG. 157, in the process when the predetermined number is reached, first, the pre-reading display state of the pre-holding is confirmed (step B871), and if there is no pre-reading display mode (step B872; No), the current occurrence holding of FIG. The process following the process for confirming whether the game is a big hit (step B848) is performed. If there is a pre-reading display mode (step B872; Yes), it is determined whether the start memory display 41b forms a reach mode (step B873).

  The start memory display 41b forms a reach mode when the start memory display 41b has two identical specific display modes. When this reach mode is formed (step B873; Yes), the predetermined time arrival processing is terminated. In this case, the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory that has occurred this time is in the normal display mode, and is in a state in which it is possible to change the hold. When the reach mode is not formed (step B873; No), it is confirmed whether the current occurrence hold or the advance hold is a big hit (step B874).

  If the current occurrence hold or advance hold is not a big hit (step B875; No), the prefetch display lottery table 3 is set (step B876), and the prefetch display lottery is executed using the set prefetch display lottery table (step B878). If the current occurrence hold or advance hold is a big hit (step B875; Yes), the prefetch display lottery table 4 is set (step B877), and the prefetch display lottery is executed using the set prefetch display lottery table (step B877). B878).

  In the process of executing the pre-reading display lottery in the set pre-reading display lottery table (step B878), information on the variation mode (presence / absence and type) of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory generated this time, A prefetching mode is acquired, and a lottery is performed to determine whether to perform prefetching display according to the selection rate defined in the prefetching display lottery table 3 or 4. When the pre-reading display is executed (step B879; Yes), that is, when the specific display mode (any one of characters 1 to 3) is selected as a result of the lottery, the selected pre-reading display mode is set ( Step B880), the processing when the predetermined number is reached is terminated. Further, when the pre-reading display is not executed (step B879; No), that is, when no change is selected as a result of the lottery, the process when the predetermined number is reached is terminated.

[Hold count command reception processing]
Further, the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. 159 is performed instead of the hold number command reception process shown in FIG. In this hold number command reception process, after performing the process related to the increase / decrease of the start memory (steps B81 to B92), it is determined whether there is a hold fluctuation execution flag that is set when the hold fluctuation is being executed (step B881). ).

  If there is no pending fluctuation execution flag (step B882; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If there is a pending fluctuation execution flag (step B882; Yes), it is determined whether the current update is subtraction (step B883). If the current update is not subtraction (step B883; No), the pending number command reception process is terminated. If the current update is subtraction (step B883; Yes), the pending fluctuation execution flag is cleared (step B884). Thereafter, the end of the hold variation is set (step B885), and the hold number command receiving process is ended. As a result, when the special figure fluctuation display game that has executed the hold fluctuation is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started, the hold fluctuation is finished. Note that steps B812, B813, and B814 to B816, which are processes related to pending fluctuation, are not performed in the changing process shown in FIG.

  With the above processing, it is possible to set the start memory display 41b so as to be in a state in which the hold variation is possible, and the hold variation can be executed with a predetermined probability. Further, it is possible to set the result of the hold fluctuation based on the pre-read result of the start memory.

  In addition, when there are two same specific display modes in the start memory display 41b and there is a start memory display 41b in a display mode different from this, it is possible to execute the hold variation, but the same in the start memory display 41b. Only when there are two specific display modes and there is a start memory display 41b which is a normal display mode as a display mode different from the specific display modes, it is possible to execute the hold variation. Moreover, you may make it perform a pending | holding fluctuation | variation irrespective of the state of the starting memory display 41b.

  In addition, if it is notified that all the start memory displays 41b are in the same specific display mode as a result of the hold fluctuation and the result of the special figure change display game based on any start memory is a special result, The result of the hold fluctuation may be displayed on the display device 41 until the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory is finished.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is less than the time required to execute the hold fluctuation, the hold fluctuation is not performed, but the hold fluctuation time is changed to the remaining fluctuation time. It is also possible to shorten the time and execute the hold fluctuation.

  In addition, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is less than the time required to execute the hold fluctuation and the hold fluctuation is not executed (when the hold fluctuation execution condition 2 is not satisfied). When the fourth start-up memory occurs, the hold fluctuation may be executed in the next special figure fluctuation display game. In this case, in the prefetch command reception process shown in FIG. 153, even if no prefetch command has been received (step B791; No), the process following the process for confirming whether the hold variation execution condition 1 is satisfied (step B822) is executed. To do. In the prefetch display process shown in FIG. 154, when the number of holds is 4 or more (step B842; Yes), when the hold variation execution condition 2 is not satisfied and the fourth start-up memory is generated. Judgment is made. In this case, the display mode is set so as to form the reach mode with the start-up storage display 41b that is second to fourth in the digestion order. As a result, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started and the start memory number becomes three, the hold fluctuation is executed.

  From the above, the specific display mode includes a plurality of specific display modes, and the display mode control means (production control device 300) displays a specific number of start memory displays 41b in the start memory display area 41a, and When the predetermined condition including that there is a start memory determined to be a special result by the prior result determination means (game control device 100) is satisfied, all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a are displayed. The information display means (production control device 300) can control to any one of the plurality of specific display forms, and the information notification means (production control device 300) displays all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a as predetermined effects. Before the display becomes the same specific display mode, an effect of operating a part of the start memory display 41b is executed.

  The predetermined condition is that a plurality of start memory displays 41b controlled to one specific display mode and a start memory display 41b not controlled to one specific display mode are simultaneously displayed in the start memory display area 41a. The information notification means (production control device 300) operates the start memory display 41b that is not controlled to one specific display mode as a predetermined production, and the display mode control unit (production control device 300) starts the start. The storage display 41b is changed step by step, and the effect of controlling to one specific display mode is executed.

[Process when a predetermined number is reached]
FIG. 160 shows another example of processing when a predetermined number is reached. In the process when the predetermined number is reached, when there is no pre-reading display mode (step B872; No), it is confirmed whether or not the current occurrence suspension is a big hit (step B891). And when it is not a big hit (step B892; No), the process at the time of predetermined number arrival is complete | finished. In the case of a big hit (step B892; Yes), a pre-read display mode that forms a reach mode with the preceding hold and the current occurrence hold is set for each (step B893), and the process when a predetermined number is reached is terminated.

  Thus, in the case of a big hit, one of the start memory displays 41b corresponding to the two preceding holds in the normal display mode and the start memory display 41b corresponding to the currently generated hold are in the same specific display mode. , It can be in a state in which the hold fluctuation can be executed.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described sixth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can execute stepwise effects (so-called step-up effects) that display information that changes in stages and that it is highly likely that a special result will be obtained as the stages progress.

  As shown in FIG. 161, there are four stages of staged effects, Steps 1 to 4, and it is notified that the possibility of a special result (big hit) increases as the stage progresses. In this staged effect, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be a notice object, the notice of the special figure fluctuation display game is given by displaying the characters in step 1 in a stepwise manner.

  Moreover, the specific display mode of the start memory display 41b includes a specific display mode in which each character is displayed as a specific display mode corresponding to each stage of the staged effects. Then, by setting the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game in which the staged effect is performed as a specific display mode in which the characters of the staged effect are displayed, It is possible to give advance notice of the number of stages to advance.

  FIG. 162 shows an example of effects related to staged effects. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the start memory display 41 corresponding to the start memory to be digested second is a specific display mode for displaying the character in step 1. Thereby, it is notified that a staged effect that proceeds to at least step 1 will be performed in the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified, the character changes from the start memory display 41b which is a specific display mode. It is also possible to operate in the display area 80 and execute staged effects in the special figure fluctuation display game as shown in FIG. 162 (c). Here, the display of the character in step 1 indicates that there is no reach or reach, but the expectation is low, and as a result, the reach state is not reached. After this effect is completed, the character returns to the original start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. 162 (d).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (e), staged effects are performed in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the start memory display 41b in the specific display mode. Here, the state where the staged effect of step 1 is performed is shown.

  FIGS. 162 (f) to (h) show a case where the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified becomes reach, and the reach occurrence confirmation is notified. showed that. In this case, as shown in FIG. 162 (f), when the character moves from the start memory display 41b in the specific display mode to the variable display area 80, the step 1 character to the step 2 character are used as stepwise effects. And the advance notice of reach occurrence is made as shown in FIG. 162 (g). Then, after the special figure variation display game ends, the character returns to the original start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. 162 (h). At this time, the character changes back to the original step 1 character. In this case, when notifying the reach occurrence confirmation for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the start memory display 41b which is in the specific display mode from this time, the character of step 2 may be returned as it is. good.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 163 (a) to (c), the start memory display 41b which is a specific display mode in the special figure change display game based on the start memory digested prior to the start memory to be notified. The character that moved to the variable display area may change when it returns to the original start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. 163 (d). Here, when returning to the original start memory display 41b, the character of step 1 is changed to the character of step 4, and as shown in FIG. The staged effect of step 4 is performed in the game.

  FIG. 164 shows an example in which the prefetching result is notified according to the character change mode. In this example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the start memory display 41 corresponding to the start memory to be digested third is a specific display mode for displaying the character in step 2. Thereby, it is foretold that a staged effect that proceeds to at least step 2 will be performed in the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory. Note that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified, a character is displayed from the start memory display 41b which is a specific display mode. As shown in FIG. 164 (c), the staged effects are executed in the special figure fluctuation display game by operating in the fluctuation display area 80. Here, the reach occurrence confirmation is announced by the display of the character in step 2, but as shown in FIG. 164 (d), the special figure variation display game is ended without the reach being generated. That is, it is in the state of the law breaking that the notice about the special figure fluctuation display game and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game do not match.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (e), in the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified, the start memory display 41b which is a specific display mode is used. The character operates in the fluctuation display area 80, and stepwise effects are executed in the special figure fluctuation display game as shown in FIG. 164 (f). Here, the SP reach occurrence confirmation is announced by the display of the character in step 3 changed from step 2, but as shown in FIG. 164 (g), the special figure variation display game is terminated without SP reach. ing. That is, here, the notice about the special figure fluctuation display game and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game are inconsistent.

  By generating such a state of breaking law, the player is informed that the expectation level that is a big hit is very high, and by generating the state of broken law multiple times, expecting a big hit I'm trying to impress you with a very high degree. As shown in FIG. 164 (h), in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the start memory display 41b in the specific display mode, an effect that changes to step 4 is performed as a stepwise effect. As shown in FIG. 164 (i), it is a big hit.

  With the effects as described above, it is possible to obtain effects that are more than the advance notice of the special figure variation display game simply by stepwise effects, and it is possible to make a novel advance notice. That is, it is possible to give notice of the occurrence of staged effects and the number of stages to progress by displaying at least the stage of the character as the specific display mode. In addition, it is possible to perform staged effects also for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified by the movement of this character, and the start memory display and the staged effect are integrated. It is possible to produce a highly interesting production. And, by performing staged effects of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is digested in advance, it is possible to change the specific display mode, and a sense of expectation about the start memory that has been the subject of notice from the beginning Therefore, the expectation can be gradually increased as the game progresses. In addition, by causing the law of the notice to break down, it is possible to make a notice with higher expectation.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform the control as described above, the prefetch command receiving process shown in FIG. 165 is performed instead of the prefetch command receiving process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B791). The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B791; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B792), and all the prefetch information on hold is acquired (step B901).

Thereafter, a notice execution lottery is performed as to whether or not a notice about staged effects is to be executed (step B902). If no notice is to be executed (step B903; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. Moreover, when executing a notice (step B903; Yes),
A notice execution flag is set (step B904), and it is determined whether the latest suspension is a big hit (step B905).

  When the latest hold is a big hit (step B905; Yes), the notice setting process 2 is performed (step B906), the latest hold is set as the notice end hold (step B909), and the prefetch command receiving process is ended. If the latest hold is not a big hit (step B905; No), it is determined whether the latest hold is SP reach 3 (step B907).

  When the latest hold is SP reach 3 (step B907; Yes), the notice setting process 2 is performed (step B906), the latest hold is set as the notice end hold (step B909), and the prefetch command receiving process is ended. If the latest hold is not SP reach 3 (step B907; No), the notice setting process 1 is performed (step B908), the latest hold is set as the notice end hold (step B909), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. .

  In the advance notice setting process 1 and the advance notice setting process 2, the setting of the type of the specific display mode of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory to be notified as shown in FIG. 162 to FIG. A process for setting the contents of staged effects in the variable display game is performed. Also, settings related to staged effects in the special-figure display game based on each start memory that is digested prior to the start memory to be notified (presence / absence of staged effects, number of progressing stages, presence / absence of character change, etc.) )I do. In particular, the effect including the breaking of the law as shown in FIG. 164 can be selected only in the advance notice setting process 2. Further, in the case of a big hit, the SP reach 3 may make it easier to select an effect including disruption of the law than in the case of a shift.

[Fluctuation processing]
In addition, the changing process shown in FIG. 166 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. 146. In this changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B121). If there is an effect request flag (step B121; Yes), PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is obtained. Clear (step B122). Thereafter, movable body request set processing is performed (step B123), variation pattern information setting processing (step B124) is performed, and random number seed initialization processing is performed (step B125).

  Next, it is confirmed whether there is a notice execution flag (step B911). If there is no notice execution flag (step B912; No), a process for setting a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B126). The following processing is performed. If there is a notice execution flag (step B912; Yes), a variation pattern including the set type of notice is set (step B913), and it is confirmed whether or not the notice end suspension is digested at the start of the current variation (step B913). Step B914).

  Then, when the notice end suspension is not digested (step B915; No), the processing after the processing (step B126) for setting the scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern is performed. In addition, when the notice end suspension is used (step B915; Yes), the notice execution flag is cleared (step B916), and the process following the process (step B126) for setting the scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern I do. In the process of setting the scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B126), a scene corresponding to the selected advance notice or stepwise effect is set, so that in the special figure variation display game, FIG. 162 to FIG. An effect as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 167 shows another example of the character change mode. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), when the character of the start memory display 41b in the specific display mode collides with the changing identification information in the variable display area 80, the character as shown in FIG. 167 (b) is obtained. May be changed to return to the original start memory display 41b as shown in FIG. 167 (c). In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (d), a character appearing in the special figure variation display game acts to change the character as shown in FIG. 167 (e), and the original character as shown in FIG. 167 (f). The start memory display 41b may be returned to. Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (f), when the changed character is a character indicating a higher level as in step 4, the start-up storage display area 41 may be enlarged. In this way, the character of the start memory display 41b that is in the specific display mode can perform a novel effect unprecedented by moving or changing in relation to the effect of the identification information or the special figure variation display game. it can.

  From the above, the display control means (production control device 300) informs that the display content displayed in the variable display area 80 changes step by step, and that there is a high possibility that a special result will be obtained as the step proceeds. The staged effects are displayed and controlled, and the specific display mode includes a specific display mode corresponding to each stage of the staged effects, and the display mode control means (effect control device 300) is stored in the start memory display area 41a. When a plurality of start memory displays 41b are displayed and the predetermined start memory display 41b is controlled in the specific display mode, the start memory preceding the start memory corresponding to the predetermined start memory display 41b is digested. Each time, the predetermined start memory display 41b can be controlled to a specific display mode in which the stage has advanced, and the information notification means (the effect control device 300) has a predetermined start memory table as the predetermined effect. In synchronism with the progression of the steps in 41b, and thus which is adapted to perform the effect of operating the above start dynamic storage display 41b.

  Further, the information notifying means (the effect control device 300) associates the effect displayed in the variable display area 80 or the identification information displayed in a variable manner when operating the predetermined start memory display 41b as the predetermined effect. This means that the predetermined start memory display 41b is operated.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the special figure variation display game that is the predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state is set as the specific variation pattern, and the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game has not yet occurred. In a state where there is no information, a prior notification indicating information related to the start-up memory is performed. The gaming machine of this embodiment also has this configuration, but it is also possible to omit this prior notification configuration and use the configuration of this embodiment alone. In addition, the configuration of the sixth embodiment described above, the configurations of the first to fifth embodiments, and the modifications of the first to fifth embodiments can be applied in appropriate combination. In this case, if there is a conflicting process, the process may be distributed depending on conditions or arbitrarily.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above is a variable display device that can execute a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, and display device 41), and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of stopping the variable display game is a predetermined special result. A start winning storage means (game control device) which is a gaming machine and extracts a predetermined random number based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning area and stores the predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory as a right to execute a variable display game 100), start memory display control means for displaying the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory stored in the start winning memory means on the variable display device, and (effect control device 300) start start memory storage means Prior result determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number stored as a memory before a variable display game based on the start-up memory is executed, and control of display contents displayed on the variable display device Display control means (production control device 300), and the display control means relates the display mode of the start memory display 41b corresponding to the start memory in relation to the determination result of the prior result determination means for the start memory, Executing and executing a predetermined effect including operating a display mode control means (effect control device 300) that can be controlled to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode and a start memory display 41b controlled to the specific display mode Information notifier for notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on the variable display game in the game or the start memory stored in the start winning memory means It includes a (effect control device 300), the.

  Therefore, a predetermined effect including operating the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is executed, and the change is executed based on the start display stored in the change display game being executed or the start winning storage means Since it is provided with information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the display game, it is possible to perform a novel advance notice. That is, since the predetermined effect related to the notification of the game result is performed using the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode as a result of the prefetching, the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is operated. Innovative, such as notifying information related to the stop result of the variable display game executed based on other start memory by the effect in the start memory display area or the start memory display operation controlled to a specific display mode Notice can be made. Moreover, it is novel not only to perform a pre-reading effect but also to produce an effect triggered by being controlled to a specific display mode, and in particular, since the start memory display controlled to the specific display mode is operated, the specific display It can be enjoyed what kind of operation is performed after becoming the mode.

  Further, the information notification means (the effect control device 300) is configured to execute a predetermined effect when the start memory display 41b including the one controlled to the specific display mode becomes a specific number.

  Therefore, since the effect is executed when the start memory number reaches a specific number (such as 3 or 4), it is conceivable to generate the start memory, which stimulates the player's motivation for the effect execution. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. In addition, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for performing the effect.

  In the display area of the variable display device (display device 41), a variable display area 80 for displaying the identification information in a variable manner and a start memory display area 41a for displaying the start memory display 41b are set, respectively, and the display control means. (Effect control device 300) is a start memory display area expansion means (effect control device 300) that expands the start memory display area 41a more than usual when a predetermined effect is executed by the information notification means (effect control device 300). have.

  Therefore, since the display control means has the start memory display area expanding means for expanding the start memory display area more than usual when the predetermined effect is executed by the information notification means, a novel advance notice can be performed. That is, unlike the normal state in which the number of start memories is simply informed, the start memory display area is enlarged, so that the player can easily recognize that it is a special effect using the start memory display, and the effect Will increase. In particular, in the case where an effect is made by relating all the start memory displays, a dynamic movement or the like is possible by expanding the area, and the range of the effect is expanded.

  Further, the information notification means (the effect control device 300) executes an effect associating all of the specific number of start memory displays 41b as a predetermined effect.

  Therefore, in order to execute an effect in association with all the start memory displays, even if there is a start memory display that is not controlled in the specific display mode, a start memory display that is not controlled in the specific display mode if the effect is started Will also contribute to the production, and it can give a sense of expectation to all start memory displays.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) divides the variable display area 80 into a plurality of areas (first variable area 81, second variable area 82, and third variable area 83), and identifies each of the plurality of areas. Identification information variation control means (effect control device 300) for variably displaying information is provided, and the display mode control means (effect control device 300) displays that a specific number of start memory displays 41b are displayed in the start memory display area 41a. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a are controlled to the specific display mode, and the information notification unit (the effect control device 300) performs the specific display mode as the predetermined effect. Each start storage display 41b controlled in accordance with each of the divided display areas 80 is operated corresponding to each divided area of the variable display area 80, and the identification information fluctuation control means is controlled to a specific display mode. The variation mode of the identification information in the variable display area 80 corresponding to the start memory display 41b, and be changed according to the operation of the above start dynamic storage display 41b.

  Therefore, since all start memory displays are controlled to the specific display mode according to the establishment of the predetermined condition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation at the start of the production. In addition, each start memory display is associated with each divided area of the variable display area, and the change mode of the identification information is changed according to the operation of the start memory display that has become the specific display mode. It is easy to understand the relationship between movement and changes in the variation of identification information, and it is possible to make a novel announcement that you can enjoy how the variation of identification information plays an important role in reporting special results. It becomes.

  The predetermined condition is that the start memory corresponding to the latest start memory display 41b is determined to derive a special result by the prior result determination means (game control device 100), and the preceding start memory preceding the latest start memory display 41b. That is, the advance start memory corresponding to the display 41b is determined not to derive the special result by the prior result determination means.

  Therefore, since the latest start memory that is digested last has a special result and the preceding start memory is out of play, the production is performed, so there is a sense of expectation for a variable display game based on the latest start memory Can do. In addition, the execution time of the notice effect can be sufficiently secured, and the player's expectation can be effectively enhanced.

  The specific display mode includes a plurality of specific display modes, and the display mode control means (production control device 300) displays a specific number of start memory displays 41b in the start memory display area 41a, and the preliminary results. When a predetermined condition including that there is a start memory determined to have a special result by the determination means (game control device 100) is satisfied, all the start memory displays 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a The specific display mode can be controlled to any one of the specific display modes, and the information notification unit (production control device 300) has the same start memory display 41b displayed in the start memory display area 41a as the predetermined production. Before entering the specific display mode, an effect of operating a part of the start memory display 41b is executed.

  Therefore, as a predetermined effect, if there is a start memory that gives a special result, the start memory display is all in the same specific display mode, and the start memory display is operated in the process of becoming the same specific display mode. It is possible to make a novel notice that the production is performed with the start memory display.

  The predetermined condition is that a plurality of start memory displays 41b controlled to one specific display mode and a start memory display 41b not controlled to one specific display mode are simultaneously displayed in the start memory display area 41a. The information notification means (production control device 300) operates the start memory display 41b that is not controlled to one specific display mode as a predetermined production, and the display mode control unit (production control device 300) starts the start. The memory display 41b is changed step by step, and an effect of controlling to one specific display mode is executed.

  Therefore, in the process of producing a variation display game by the start memory display, by the start memory display controlled to one specific display mode, and the start memory display not controlled to the one specific display mode, A so-called reach state is formed, and the start memory display that is not controlled to one specific display mode is changed step by step, thereby providing a sense of expectation that all the start memory displays become one specific display mode. It can be gradually increased, and an interesting production can be performed.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) changes in stages as the display contents displayed in the variable display area 80, and informs that there is a high possibility that a special result will be obtained as the stage progresses. The display control is performed, and the specific display mode includes a specific display mode corresponding to each stage of the staged performance, and the display mode control means (production control device 300) has a plurality of startups in the startup storage display area 41a. When the memory display 41b is displayed and the predetermined start memory display 41b is controlled to the specific display mode, each time the start memory preceding the start memory corresponding to the predetermined start memory display 41b is digested, The predetermined start memory display 41b can be controlled to a specific display mode in which the stage has advanced, and the information notification means (effect control device 300) displays the predetermined start memory display 41b as the predetermined effect. Kicking in synchronism with the progression of the stage, so as to execute an effect of operating the above start dynamic storage display 41b.

  Therefore, it is possible to make a novel notice that the specific display mode is changed to a mode corresponding to each stage of the staged effects appearing in the variable display game, and it is easy to grasp an increase in expectation. Moreover, since the opportunity to change is a prior reservation digest, expectation can be gradually heightened with progress of a game.

  Further, the information notifying means (the effect control device 300), when operating the predetermined start memory display 41b as the predetermined effect, is associated with the effect displayed in the variable display area 80 or the identification information displayed in a variable manner. The start memory display 41b is operated.

  Therefore, since the start memory display in which the aspect changes stepwise in relation to the effect appearing in the game being executed or the identification information is operated, it becomes a highly interesting effect in which the display contents are integrated.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 start prize opening (start prize area)
37 Ordinary variable prize device (start prize area)
41 Display device (variable display device)
41a Start memory display area 41b Start memory display 51 Special figure 1 display (variable display device)
52 Special figure 2 display (variation display device)
80 Fluctuation display area 81 First fluctuation area (area)
82 2nd variation area (area)
83 3rd variation region (region)
100 Game control device (start prize storage means, prior result determination means)
300 effect control device (starting storage display control means, display control means, display mode control means, information notification means, starting storage display area expansion means, identification information variation control means)

Claims (10)

A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area,
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous for a player when the result of stopping the variable display game is a special result determined in advance,
Start winning storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area and storing the predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory for executing the variable display game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start winning memory means on the variable display device;
Prior result determination means for determining a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory;
Display control means for controlling display contents displayed on the variable display device;
With
The display control means includes
Display mode control means capable of controlling the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the start memory to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode in relation to the determination result of the prior result determination unit for the start memory; ,
A variation that is executed based on a variation display game being executed or a start memory stored in the start winning memory means by executing a predetermined effect including operating a start memory display controlled in the specific display mode Information notifying means for notifying information related to the stop result of the display game;
A gaming machine comprising:   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information notification unit executes the predetermined effect when a start memory display including the information controlled by the specific display mode reaches a specific number. In the display area in the variable display device, a variable display area for displaying the identification information in a variable manner and a start memory display area for displaying the start memory display are set, respectively.
The said display control means has a start memory | storage display area expansion means to expand the said start memory display area rather than usual, when a predetermined effect is performed by the said information alerting | reporting means. Gaming machine.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the information notification means executes an effect in which all of the specific number of start memory displays are related as the predetermined effect. The display control means includes identification information fluctuation control means for dividing the fluctuation display area into a plurality of areas and variably displaying the identification information in each of the plurality of areas.
The display mode control means displays all start memory displays displayed in the start memory display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied including that the specific number of start memory displays are displayed in the start memory display area. Control to the specific display mode,
The information informing means operates, as the predetermined effect, each start memory display controlled to the specific display mode in correspondence with each divided area of the variable display area,
The identification information variation control means changes the variation mode of the identification information in the variation display area corresponding to the startup storage display controlled to the specific display mode according to the operation of the startup storage display. Item 5. The gaming machine according to item 4. The predetermined condition is:
A start memory corresponding to the latest start memory display is determined to derive the special result by the prior result determination means;
6. The preceding start memory corresponding to the preceding start memory display preceding the latest start memory display is determined not to derive the special result by the prior result determination means. The gaming machine described. The specific display mode includes a plurality of specific display modes,
The display mode control means includes a start condition in which the specific number of start memory displays is displayed in the start memory display area and there is a start memory determined by the prior result determination means to be the special result. Is established, it is possible to control all the start memory display displayed in the start memory display area to any one of the plurality of specific display modes,
The information notification means executes, as the predetermined effect, an effect that operates a part of the start memory display before all the start memory displays displayed in the start memory display area have the same specific display mode. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein: The predetermined condition is that a plurality of start memory displays controlled to one specific display mode and a start memory display not controlled to the one specific display mode are simultaneously displayed in the start memory display area. ,
The information notification means operates the start memory display that is not controlled to the one specific display mode as the predetermined effect, and changes the start memory display step by step by the display mode control unit. 8. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein an effect controlled to a specific display mode is executed. The display control means performs display control of a staged effect that informs that the display content displayed in the variable display area changes in stages and is likely to become the special result as the stage progresses,
The specific display mode includes a specific display mode corresponding to each stage of the staged effects,
The display mode control means responds to the predetermined start memory display when a plurality of start memory displays are displayed in the start memory display area and the predetermined start memory display is controlled to the specific display mode. Each time the start memory preceding the start memory to be used is digested, the predetermined start memory display can be controlled to a specific display mode advanced in the stage,
4. The game according to claim 3, wherein the information notification unit executes, as the predetermined effect, an effect that operates the start memory display in synchronization with the progress of the stage in the predetermined start memory display. Machine. When the predetermined start memory display is operated as the predetermined effect, the information notifying means associates the predetermined start memory display with the effect displayed in the variable display area or the identification information displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the game machine is operated.

Images